INVERTER

INVERTER
FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Connection)

FR-E800
(200V / 400V CLASS)
Compact, high functionality inverters
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0900(22K)
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0440(22K)
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to 0110(2.2K)
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0900(22K)E
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0440(22K)E
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to 0110(2.2K)E
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0900(22K)SCE
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0440(22K)SCE
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to 0110(2.2K)SCE

Instruction Manual (Connection) (200V / 400V CLASS)

FR-E800 Instruction
Model
Manual (Connection)

Model code 1A2-P89

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

IB(NA)-0600865ENG-G(2110)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

G
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

1.1 Product checking and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.2 Component names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

CONTENTS
1.3 Operation steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

1.4 Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

2.1 Peripheral devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

2.1.1 Inverter and peripheral devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

2.1.2 Peripheral devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2.3.1 Inverter installation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2.3.2 Amount of heat generated by the inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.3.3 Output current reduction when the surrounding air temperature is between 50°C and 60°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.3.4 Standby power consumption by the inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.5 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.3.6 Inverter installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

2.5 Main circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

2.5.1 Details on the main circuit terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

2.5.2 Main circuit terminal layout and wiring to power supply and motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.5.3 Applicable cables and wiring length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2.5.4 Earthing (grounding) precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

2.6 Control circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

2.6.1 Details on the control circuit terminals (Standard model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

2.6.2 Details on the control circuit terminals (Ethernet model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.6.3 Details on the control circuit terminals (Safety communication model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.6.4 Control logic (sink/source) change (Standard model / Ethernet model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
2.6.5 Wiring of control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.6.6 Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2.6.7 Safety stop function (Standard model / Ethernet model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
2.6.8 Safety communication function (Safety communication model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

2.8 Communication connectors and terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

2.8.1 PU connector (Standard model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

2.8.2 Ethernet connector (Ethernet model / Safety communication model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

1
 2.8.3 USB connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

2.9.1 Connection of the brake resistor (FR-E820-0030(0.4K) or higher, FR-E840-0016(0.4K) or higher, and FR-E820S-0030(0.4K)
or higher). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
2.9.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.9.3 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) (Standard model / Ethernet model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2.9.4 Connection of the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) (Standard model / Ethernet model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2.9.5 Connection of the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) (Standard model / Ethernet model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
2.9.6 Connection of the DC reactor (FR-HEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Chapter 3 Precautions for Use of the Inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

3.1.2 Techniques and measures for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

3.2 Power supply harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.2.1 Power supply harmonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.2.2 Harmonic suppression guidelines in Japan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

3.3 Installation of a reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

3.6 Checklist before starting operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 4 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

4.1 Inverter rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

4.2 Motor rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

4.2.1 Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor with encoder SF-PR-SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4.2.2 Mitsubishi Electric Vector control dedicated motor SF-V5RU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2.3 PM motor MM-GKR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.2.4 PM motor EM-A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

4.3 Common specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

4.4 Outline dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

4.4.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings (Standard model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

4.4.2 Inverter outline dimension drawings (Ethernet model / Safety communication model). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
4.4.3 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

2
Chapter 5 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

5.1 How to check specification changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

5.1.1 Details of specification changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

CONTENTS

3
 Safety Instructions
Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Electric inverter.
This Instruction Manual provides detailed instructions for advanced settings of the FR-E800 series inverters.
Incorrect handling might cause an unexpected fault. Before using this product, read this Instruction Manual and the document
enclosed with the product carefully to ensure proper use.
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect this product until you have read the Instruction Manuals and appended
documents carefully. Do not use this product until you have a full knowledge of this product mechanism, safety information and
instructions.
Installation, operation, maintenance and inspection must be performed by qualified personnel. Here, qualified personnel means
a person who meets all the following conditions:
• A person who possesses a certification in regard with electric appliance handling, or person took a proper engineering
training. Such training may be available at your local Mitsubishi Electric office. Contact your local sales office for schedules
and locations.
• A person who can access operating manuals for the protective devices (for example, light curtain) connected to the safety
control system, or a person who has read these manuals thoroughly and familiarized themselves with the protective
devices.

In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

WARNING Incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight injury,
CAUTION or may cause only material damage.

Note that even the level may lead to a serious consequence depending on conditions. Be sure to follow the
instructions of both levels as they are critical to personnel safety.

4
Electric shock prevention
WARNING
 Do not remove the front cover or the wiring cover while the power of this product is ON, and do not run this product with
the front cover or the wiring cover removed as the exposed high voltage terminals or the charging part of the circuitry
can be touched. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
 Even if power is OFF, do not remove the front cover except for wiring or periodic inspection as the inside of this product
is charged. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
 Before wiring or inspection, check that the LED display of the operation panel is OFF. Any person who is involved in
wiring or inspection shall wait for 10 minutes or longer after the power supply has been cut off, and check that there are
no residual voltage using a digital multimeter or the like. The capacitor is charged with high voltage for some time after
power OFF, and it is dangerous.
 This product must be earthed (grounded). Earthing (grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local
safety regulations and electrical code (NEC section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards). A neutral-
point earthed (grounded) power supply must be used for 400 V class of this product to be compliant with EN standard.
 Any person who is involved in wiring or inspection of this product shall be fully competent to do the work.
 This product body must be installed before wiring. Otherwise you may get an electric shock or be injured.
 Do not touch the setting dial or keys with wet hands. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Do not change the cooling fan while power is ON as it is dangerous.
 Do not touch the printed circuit board or handle the cables with wet hands. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Never touch the motor terminals, etc. right after powering OFF as the DC voltage is applied to the motor for 1 second at
powering OFF if the main circuit capacitor capacity is measured. Doing so may cause an electric shock.
 Before wiring or inspection for a PM motor, confirm that the PM motor is stopped as a PM motor is a synchronous motor
with high-performance magnets embedded inside and high-voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the motor
is running even after the power of this product is turned OFF. In an application, such as fan and blower, that the motor
may be driven by the load, connect a low-voltage manual contactor at the output side of this product and keep it open
during wiring and inspection of this product. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.

Fire prevention
CAUTION
 This product must be installed on a nonflammable wall without holes in it so that its components cannot be touched from
behind. Installing it on or near flammable material may cause a fire.
 If this product becomes faulty, the product power must be switched OFF. A continuous flow of large current may cause
a fire.
 When using a brake resistor, a sequence that will turn OFF power when a fault signal is output must be configured.
Otherwise the brake resistor may excessively overheat due to damage of the brake transistor and such, causing a fire.
 Do not connect a resistor directly to the DC terminals P/+ and N/-. Doing so could cause a fire.
 Across terminals P/+ and PR, connect only an external brake resistor.
 Be sure to perform daily and periodic inspections as specified in the Instruction Manual (Maintenance). There is a
possibility of explosion, damage, or fire if this product is used without inspection.

5
 Injury prevention
CAUTION
 The voltage applied to each terminal must be as specified in the Instruction Manual. Otherwise an explosion or damage
may occur.
 The cables must be connected to the correct terminals. Otherwise an explosion or damage may occur.
 The polarity (+ and -) must be correct. Otherwise an explosion or damage may occur.
 While power is ON or for some time after power-OFF, do not touch this product as it will be extremely hot. Doing so may
cause burns.

6
Additional instructions
The following instructions must be also followed. If the product is handled incorrectly, it may cause unexpected fault, an injury,
or an electric shock.

CAUTION
Transportation and installation
 To prevent injury, wear cut-resistant gloves when opening packaging with sharp tools.
 Use proper lifting techniques or a trolley when carrying products. Failure to do so may lead to injuries.
 Do not stand or place any heavy object on this product.
 Do not stack the boxes containing this product higher than the number recommended.
 When carrying this product, do not hold it by the front cover or the setting dial. It may fall or break.
 During installation, caution must be taken not to drop this product as doing so may cause injuries.
 The product must be installed on a surface that withstands the weight of the product.
 Do not install the product on a hot surface.
 Ensure the mounting orientation of this product is correct.
 Ensure this product is mounted securely with screws in its enclosure.
 Do not install or operate this product if it is damaged or has parts missing.
 Foreign conductive objects must be prevented from entering this product. That includes screws and metal fragments or
other flammable substance such as oil.
 As this product is a precision instrument, do not drop or subject it to impact.
 The surrounding air temperature must be between -20°C and +60°C (non-freezing). The rated current must be reduced
at a surrounding air temperature above 50°C. Otherwise this product may be damaged.
 The ambient humidity must be 90% RH or less (non-condensing) for models without circuit board coating and 95% RH
or less (non-condensing) for models with circuit board coating. Otherwise this product may be damaged.
 The temporary storage temperature (applicable to a short limited time such as a transportation time) must be between -
40°C and +70°C. Otherwise this product may be damaged.
 This product must be used indoors (without corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt). Otherwise this product
may be damaged.
 Do not use this product at an altitude above 3000 m. Vibration should not exceed 5.9 m/s2 at 10 to 55 Hz in X, Y, and Z
directions. Otherwise this product may be damaged. (Refer to page 33 for details.)
 If halogens (including fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine) contained in fumigants for wood packages enter this
product, the product may be damaged. Prevent the entry of fumigant residuals or use an alternative method such as heat
disinfection. Note that sterilization or disinfection of wood packages should be performed before packing the product.
Wiring
 Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge absorber, or radio noise filter on the output side of this product.
These devices may overheat or burn out.
 The output terminals (terminals U, V, and W) must be connected to a motor correctly. Otherwise the motor will rotate
inversely.
 Even with the power OFF, high voltage is still applied to the terminals U, V and W while the PM motor is running. Ensure
the PM motor has stopped before carrying out any wiring. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
 Never connect a PM motor to a commercial power supply. Connecting a commercial power supply to the input terminals
(U, V, W) of a PM motor will burn it out. The PM motor must be applied a power from the inverter with the output terminals
(U, V, W).
Test operation
 Before starting the operation, confirm or adjust the parameter settings. Failure to do so may cause some machines to
make unexpected motions.

7
 WARNING
Usage
 Stay away from the equipment after using the retry function in this product as the equipment will restart suddenly after
the output shutoff of this product.
 Access to the motor is allowed only after it is fully confirmed that the motor does not start running.
 Depending on the function settings of this product, the product does not stop its output even when the STOP/RESET
key on the operation panel is pressed. To prepare for it, provide a separate circuit and switch (to turn OFF the power of
this product, or apply a mechanical brake, etc.) for an emergency stop.
 Be sure to turn OFF the start (STF/STR) signal before clearing the fault as this product will restart the motor suddenly
after a fault is cleared.
 Do not use a PM motor for an application that the motor may be driven by the load and run at a speed higher than the
maximum motor speed.
 Use only a three-phase induction motor or PM motor as a load on this product. Connection of any other electrical
equipment to the output of this product may damage the equipment.
 Performing pre-excitation (LX signal and X13 signal) under torque control may start the motor running at a low speed
even when the start signal (STF or STR) is not input. This product with the start command ON may also rotate the motor
at a low speed when the speed limit value is set to zero. Confirm that the motor running does not cause any safety
problems before performing pre-excitation.
 Do not modify this product.
 Do not remove any part which is not instructed to be removed in the Instruction Manuals. Doing so may lead to a failure
or damage of this product.

8
 CAUTION
Usage
 When installing the MC on the output side of the inverter, turn it ON/OFF while both the inverter and motor are at a stop.
 The electronic thermal O/L relay function may not be enough for protection of a motor from overheating. It is
recommended to install an external thermal relay or a PTC thermistor for overheat protection.
 Do not repeatedly start or stop this product with a magnetic contactor on its input side. Doing so may shorten the life of
this product.
 Use a noise filter or other means to minimize electromagnetic interference with other electronic equipment used nearby
this product.
 Appropriate precautions must be taken to suppress harmonics. Otherwise harmonics in power systems generated from
this product may heat/damage a power factor correction capacitor or a generator.
 To drive a 400 V class motor with this product, use an insulation-enhanced motor, or take measures to suppress surge
voltage. Otherwise surge voltage, which is attributed to the length and thickness of wire, may occur at the motor
terminals, causing the motor insulation to deteriorate.
 When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is generated on the motor shaft, which may cause electrical
corrosion of the bearing. Take measures such as decreasing the carrier frequency.
 As all parameters return to their initial values after the Parameter clear or All parameter clear is performed, the needed
parameters for this product operation must be set again before the operation is started.
 This product can be easily set for high-speed operation. Therefore, consider all things related to the operation such as
the performance of a motor and equipment in a system before the setting change.
 This product's brake function cannot be used as a mechanical brake. Use a separate device instead.
 When performing an inverter operation with frequent starts/stops, rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of
the inverter will repeat due to a repeated flow of large current, shortening the life.
 Perform an inspection and test operation of this product if it has been stored for a long period of time.
 To avoid damage to this product due to static electricity, static electricity in your body must be discharged before you
touch this product.
 Only one PM motor can be connected to a single unit of this product.
 A PM motor must be used under PM sensorless vector control. Do not use a synchronous motor, induction motor, or
synchronous induction motor.
 Do not connect a PM motor to this product with it set to the induction motor control setting (initial setting). Do not connect
an induction motor to this product with it set to the PM sensorless vector control setting. Doing so will cause failure.
 As a process of starting a PM motor, turn ON the power of this product first, and then close the contactor on the output
side of this product.
 To maintain the security (confidentiality, integrity, and availability) of the inverter and the system against unauthorized
access, DoS*1 attacks, computer viruses, and other cyberattacks from external devices via network, take appropriate
measures such as firewalls, virtual private networks (VPNs), and antivirus solutions. We shall have no responsibility or
liability for any problems involving inverter trouble and system trouble by DoS attacks, unauthorized access, computer
viruses, and other cyberattacks.
 Depending on the network environment, the inverter may not operate as intended due to delays or disconnection in
communication. Carefully consider what type of environment the inverter will be used in and any safety issues related to
its use.
 When the emergency drive function is enabled, the operation is continued or the retry operation (automatic reset and
restart) is repeated even if a fault occurs, which may damage or burn this product and the motor. Before restarting the
normal operation after the operation using the emergency drive function, make sure that this product and the motor have
no fault.
*1 DoS: A denial-of-service (DoS) attack disrupts services by overloading systems or exploiting vulnerabilities, resulting in a denial-of-service (DoS)
state.

9
 CAUTION
Emergency stop
 A safety backup such as an emergency brake must be provided for devices or equipment in a system to prevent
hazardous conditions in case of failure of this product or an external device controlling this product.
 If the breaker installed on the input side of this product trips, check for wiring faults (such as short circuits) and damage
to internal parts of this product. Identify and remove the cause of the trip before resetting the tripped breaker (or before
applying the power to this product again).
 When any protective function is activated, take an appropriate corrective action before resetting this product to resume
the operation.
Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
 Do not carry out a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of this product. Doing so will cause failure.
Disposal
 This product must be treated as industrial waste.

Compliance with the EU Machinery Directive—Safety functions

To achieve functional safety, any work on the product such as wiring and inspections must be performed according to this
document and the FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual (Functional Safety) by technicians who took a safety standard training.

WARNING
 Any misuse of safety functions may cause physical injury, damage to property, or economic loss. To confirm that the
system is compliant with safety standards, a risk assessment must be conducted for the entire system. We shall not be
liable for the compliance of the system with safety standards.
 To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before working on the
inverter. Measure the DC bus voltage between terminals P/+ and N/- or other measurement points to verify zero voltage.
(For the measurement points and the capacitor discharge time, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
 When the power supply to the gate drive circuit is shut off by a safety function, the inverter and the motor are not insulated
each other. To avoid an electric shock hazard, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before wiring
or inspection of the motor. Measure the DC bus voltage between terminals P/+ and N/- or other measurement points to
verify zero voltage. (For the measurement points and the capacitor discharge time, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Maintenance).)

CAUTION
 We shall not be liable for the compliance or non-compliance with any local, national, or international codes or regulations
for the installation of this product.
 Installation not compliant with applicable codes or directives may cause physical injury or damage to property.

General instruction
 For clarity, illustrations in this Instruction Manual may be drawn with covers or safety guards removed. Ensure all covers
and safety guards are properly installed prior to starting operation. For details on the PM motor, refer to the Instruction
Manual of the PM motor.

10
 CHAPTER 1
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
4

1.1 Product checking and accessories .........................................................................................................................13

1.2 Component names .................................................................................................................................................15
6
1.3 Operation steps ......................................................................................................................................................18
1.4 Related manuals.....................................................................................................................................................20
7

10

11
 1 Introduction
The contents described in this chapter must be read before using this product.
Always read the instructions before use.

 Abbreviations
Item Description
Operation panel, parameter unit (FR-PU07), LCD operation panel (FR-LU08), and enclosure
PU
surface operation panel (FR-PA07)
Parameter unit (FR-PU07), LCD operation panel (FR-LU08), and enclosure surface operation
Parameter unit
panel (FR-PA07)
Inverter Mitsubishi Electric inverter FR-E800 series
E800 Standard model (RS-485 + SIL2/PLd functional safety)
E800-E Ethernet model (Ethernet + SIL2/PLd functional safety)
E800-SCE Safety communication model (Ethernet + SIL3/PLe functional safety)
FM type inverter Standard model with terminal FM (pulse output)
AM type inverter Standard model with terminal AM (voltage output)
Vector control compatible option FR-A8AP E kit
Pr. Parameter number (Number assigned to function)
PU operation Operation using the PU (operation panel / parameter unit)
External operation Operation using the control circuit signals
Combined operation Combined operation using the PU (operation panel / parameter unit) and External operation
Mitsubishi Electric standard efficiency motor SF-JR
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor SF-HRCA
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance
SF-PR
energy-saving motor
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance
SF-PR-SC
energy-saving motor with encoder
Mitsubishi Electric Vector control dedicated
SF-V5RU
motor
Mitsubishi Electric geared motor GM-[]
Mitsubishi Electric inverter-driven geared
GM-DZ, GM-DP
motor for encoder feedback control
Mitsubishi Electric PM motor MM-GKR, EM-A

 Trademarks
• EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
• MODBUS is a registered trademark of SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
• BACnet is a registered trademark of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE).
• DeviceNet and EtherNet/IP are registered trademarks of ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, INC).
• PROFIBUS and PROFINET are either trademarks or registered trademarks of PROFIBUS & PROFINET International.
• CC-Link IE TSN and CC-Link IE Field Network Basic are registered trademarks of CC-Link Partner Association.
• Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective owners.

 Notes on descriptions in this Instruction Manual

• Connection diagrams in this Instruction Manual appear with the control logic of the input terminals as sink logic, unless
otherwise specified. (For the control logic, refer to page 67.)

 Harmonic Suppression Guidelines

All the models of the inverters used by specific consumers are covered by "the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for
Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage". (For details, refer to page 105.)

12 1. Introduction
1.1 Product checking and accessories 1

Unpack the product and check the rating plate and the capacity plate of the inverter to ensure that the model agrees with the
order and the product is intact. 2
 Inverter model
3

FR-E8 2 0 - 0008 -1 4
A B C D E F
5

Rating plate
6
Inverter model MODEL :FR-E820-0008-1
Input rating INPUT :XXXXX

Output rating OUTPUT:XXXXX

7
SERIAL SERIAL:XXXXXXXXXXX

Country of origin MADE IN XXXXX

8

• A: The voltage class is shown.

10
Symbol Voltage class
2 200 V class
4 400 V class

• B: The number of phases of the power source is shown.

Symbol Description
None Three-phase input
S Single-phase input

• C: The inverter rated capacity or the inverter rated current is shown.

Symbol Description
0.1K to 22K Inverter ND rated capacity (kW)
0008 to 0900 Inverter ND rated current (A)

• D: The communication type and the functional safety specification are shown.
Symbol Communication / functional safety
None Standard model (RS-485 + SIL2/PLd)
E Ethernet model (Ethernet + SIL2/PLd)
SCE Safety communication model (Ethernet + SIL3/
PLe)

1. Introduction
1.1 Product checking and accessories
13
 • E: The output specification for monitoring and the rated frequency are shown for the standard model, and the
communication protocol group is shown for the Ethernet model and the safety communication model. The control logic is
fixed to the source logic for the safety communication model.

Rated Control logic

Symbol Monitoring/protocol specifications frequency Input signal Safety stop
(initial setting) (initial status) signal
-1 Pulse (terminal FM) 60 Hz Sink logic
-4 Voltage (terminal AM) 50 Hz Source logic
-5 Voltage (terminal AM) 60 Hz Sink logic
Protocol group A (CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic,
PA 60 Hz Sink logic Source logic
MODBUS/TCP, EtherNet/IP, and BACnet/IP)
(fixed)
Protocol group B (CC-Link IE TSN, CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, Sink logic / source
PB 50 Hz
MODBUS/TCP, PROFINET) logic*1
Sink logic / source
PC*2 Protocol group C (EtherCAT) 50 Hz
logic*1
*1 The initial status of the control logic differs depending on the inverter model.
Sink logic for the models indicated with the rated capacity (kW)
Source logic for the models indicated with the rated current (A).
*2 Available for the Ethernet model only.
• F: Availability of circuit board coating / plated conductors is shown.
Symbol Circuit board coating*1 Plated conductor
None Without coating Without plated conductors
-60 With coating Without plated conductors
-06*2 With coating With plated conductors

*1 Conforming to IEC 60721-3-3:1994 3C2

*2 Applicable for the FR-E820-0470(11K) or higher, and the FR-E840-0230(11K) or higher.

NOTE
• In this Instruction Manual, the inverter model name consists of the inverter rated current and the applicable motor capacity.
(Example) FR-E820-0008(0.1K)

 Accessory
• Fan cover fixing screws
These screws are necessary for compliance with the EU Directives. For details, refer to the document enclosed with the
product.
Capacity Screw size (mm) Quantity
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to FR-E820-0330(7.5K),
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0170(7.5K), M3 × 35 1
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) or higher
FR-E820-0470(11K), FR-E820-0600(15K),
M3 × 35 2
FR-E840-0230(11K), FR-E840-0300(15K)
FR-E820-0760(18.5K) or higher, FR-E840-
M3 × 50 2
0380(18.5K) or higher

 How to read the SERIAL number

The SERIAL consists of two symbols, three characters indicating the production year
Rating plate example
and month, and six characters indicating the control number.
Symbol Year Month Control number The last two digits of the production year are indicated as the Year, and the Month is
SERIAL indicated by 1 to 9, X (October), Y (November), or Z (December).

14 1. Introduction
1.1 Product checking and accessories
1.2 Component names 1

 Standard model 2
Component names are as follows.

(k)
4

(a) 5

(e) (b)
(c)
6
(f)
(d)
(g)

7
(l)

(j) 9
(h)

10

(i)

Symbol Name Description Refer to page

Instruction
(a) Plug-in option connection connector Connects a plug-in option or a communication option. Manual of
each option
(b) Control logic switch Select the sink logic (SINK) or the source logic (SOURCE). 67
(c) Voltage/current input switch Select voltage or current for the input via terminals 2 and 4. *1

(d) PU connector Used for the RS-485 communication. 85

Operates and monitors the inverter. The operation panel cannot be *1
(e) Operation panel
removed from the inverter.
USB mini B connector Connector for a personal computer. Enables communication with FR
(f) 88
Configurator2.
(g) Control circuit terminal block Connects cables for the control circuit. 60
(h) Main circuit terminal block Connects cables for the main circuit. 51
(i) Comb-shaped wiring cover This cover is removable without unplugging cables. 27
(j) Front cover Remove this cover for wiring. 27
Cools the inverter (FR-E820-0080(1.5K) or higher, FR-E840-0040(1.5K) *2
(k) Cooling fan
or higher, and FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) or higher)
Instruction
(l) Earth plate Connects the option and the inverter for earthing (grounding). Manual of
each option
*1 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance).

1. Introduction
1.2 Component names
15
  Ethernet model
Component names are as follows.

(k)

(a)

(e)
(b)

(f) (c)

(d)
(g)

(l)

(j)

(h)

(i)

Refer to
Symbol Name Description
page
Instruction
(a) Plug-in option connection connector Connects a plug-in option or a communication option. Manual of
each option
(b) Control logic switch Select the sink logic (SINK) or the source logic (SOURCE). 67
(c) Voltage/current input switch Select voltage or current for the input via terminals 2 and 4. *1

(d) Ethernet connector (2 ports) Connector for the Ethernet dedicated cable for connection to the network. 86
Operates and monitors the inverter. The operation panel cannot be removed *1
(e) Operation panel
from the inverter.
USB mini B connector Connector for a personal computer. Enables communication with FR
(f) 88
Configurator2.
(g) Control circuit terminal block Connects cables for the control circuit. 60
(h) Main circuit terminal block Connects cables for the main circuit. 51
(i) Comb-shaped wiring cover This cover is removable without unplugging cables. 27
(j) Front cover Remove this cover for wiring. 27
Cools the inverter (FR-E820-0080(1.5K) or higher, FR-E840-0040(1.5K) or *2
(k) Cooling fan
higher, and FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) or higher)
Instruction
(l) Earth plate Connects the option and the inverter for earthing (grounding). Manual of
each option
*1 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance).

16 1. Introduction
1.2 Component names
 Safety communication model
Component names are as follows. 1

2
(j)
3

(a) 4
(d)
5
(e) (b)

(c)
(f)
6

7
(k)

8
(i)

(g) 9

10

(h)

Refer to
Symbol Name Description
page
Instruction
(a) Plug-in option connection connector Connects a plug-in option or a communication option. Manual of
each option
(b) Voltage/current input switch Select voltage or current for the input via terminals 2 and 4. *1

(c) Ethernet connector (2 ports) Connector for the Ethernet dedicated cable for connection to the network. 86
Operates and monitors the inverter. The operation panel cannot be removed *1
(d) Operation panel
from the inverter.
USB mini B connector Connector for a personal computer. Enables communication with FR
(e) 88
Configurator2.
(f) Control circuit terminal block Connects cables for the control circuit. 60
(g) Main circuit terminal block Connects cables for the main circuit. 51
(h) Comb-shaped wiring cover This cover is removable without unplugging cables. 27
(i) Front cover Remove this cover for wiring. 27
Cools the inverter (FR-E820-0080(1.5K)SCE or higher, FR-E840- *2
(j) Cooling fan
0040(1.5K)SCE or higher, and FR-E820S-0080(1.5K)SCE or higher)
Instruction
(k) Earth plate Connects the option and the inverter for earthing (grounding). Manual of
each option
*1 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance).

1. Introduction
1.2 Component names
17
 1.3 Operation steps

: Initial setting Step of operation

Frequency command
(a)
Frequency

Installation/mounting
Inverter
output
frequency Wiring of the power
supply and motor
(b)
(Hz) Time
Start command ON (S)
Control mode selection (c)
Start command via the PU/Ethernet
How
How
o connector of the inverter and plug-in
to
to give
e aa start
give start option (Communication)
command?
(d)
command?
m Initial setting for the Ethernet model and
the safety communication model
Connect a switch, relay, etc.
Start command with to the control circuit
on the operation panel (PU) terminal block of the inverter
to give a start command. (External)
Initial setting for the standard model

How
How w to
to
give
give aa frequency
frequency
re How
How w to
to
command?
command?
m give
give aa frequency
frequency
re
command?
command?
m

Set from the operation Change frequency Perform frequency setting Perform frequency setting
panel with ON/OFF switches by a voltage output device by a current output device
connected to terminals (Connection across (Connection across
(multi-speed setting) terminals 2 and 5) terminals 4 and 5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
(e) (f) (g) (h)

Set from the operation Change of frequency Perform frequency setting Perform frequency setting
panel with ON/OFF switches by a voltage output device by a current output device
connected to terminals (Connection across (Connection across
(multi-speed setting) terminals 2 and 5) terminals 4 and 5)
(PU) (External) (External) (External)
(i) (j) (k) (l)

18 1. Introduction
1.3 Operation steps
Symbol Overview Refer to page
(a)
(b)
Install the inverter.
Perform wiring for the power supply and the motor.
33
51
1
Select the control method (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control, Instruction Manual
(c)
Vector control, and PM sensorless vector control). (Function)

(d) Give the start command via communication.

Instruction Manual
(Communication)
2
Instruction Manual
(e) Give both the start and frequency commands from the PU. (PU operation mode)
(Function)

(f)
Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command via terminals RH, RM, and RL. (External/ Instruction Manual 3
PU combined operation mode 2) (Function)
Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command by voltage input via terminal 2. (External/ Instruction Manual
(g)
PU combined operation mode 2) (Function)

(h)
Give the start command from the PU and the frequency command by current input via terminal 4. (External/ Instruction Manual 4
PU combined operation mode 2) (Function)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command from the PU. (External/PU Instruction Manual
(i)
combined operation mode 1) (Function)

(j)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command via terminals RH, RM, and RL. Instruction Manual 5
(External operation mode) (Function)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command by voltage input via terminal 2. Instruction Manual
(k)
(External operation mode) (Function)
Give the start command via terminal STF or STR and the frequency command by current input via terminal 4. Instruction Manual 6
(l)
(External operation mode) (Function)

10

1. Introduction
1.3 Operation steps
19
 1.4 Related manuals
Manuals related to the FR-E800 inverter are shown in the following table.
Name Manual number
FR-E800 Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600857ENG
FR-E800-E Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600860ENG
FR-E800-SCE Inverter Safety Guideline IB-0600921ENG
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function) IB-0600868ENG
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Communication) IB-0600871ENG
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance) IB-0600874ENG
FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Functional Safety) BCN-A23488-000
FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual (Functional safety) BCN-A23488-004
FR Configurator 2 Instruction Manual IB-0600516ENG
PLC Function Programming Manual IB-0600492ENG

20 1. Introduction
1.4 Related manuals
 CHAPTER 2
CHAPTER 2 Installation and Wiring
4

2.1 Peripheral devices ..................................................................................................................................................22

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover .........................................................................................................27
6
2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design ....................................................................................................33
2.4 Terminal connection diagrams................................................................................................................................41
2.5 Main circuit terminals ..............................................................................................................................................51
7
2.6 Control circuit..........................................................................................................................................................60
2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control) .............................................................................................78
2.8 Communication connectors and terminals..............................................................................................................85
8
2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units ..................................................................................................................89

10

21
 2 Installation and Wiring
This chapter explains the installation and the wiring of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.

2.1 Peripheral devices

2.1.1 Inverter and peripheral devices

(b) Three-phase AC power supply

(c) Molded case circuit breaker (a) Inverter (n) USB power supply
(MCCB) or earth leakage
current breaker (ELB), fuse USB device
(Mini B connector)

Personal computer
(FR Configurator2)

(d) Magnetic contactor (MC)

(e) AC reactor (f) DC reactor

(FR-HAL) (FR-HEL) (o) Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)

P/+
PR

IM connection PM connection
U VW U VW
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P/+ P1 P/+ N/-

(g) Noise filter (p) Noise filter

Earth
(FR-BSF01, (ferrite core)
(Ground)
FR-BLF) (FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)

(h) Radio noise filter

(FR-BIF) (r) Contactor
Example) No-fuse
switch
(DSN type)

(l) Brake unit

(FR-BU2, FR-BU)

(q) Induction Earth (s) PM motor

motor
(Ground)
P/+ PR
P/+
PR

(i) High power factor (j) Multifunction regeneration (m) Resistor unit (FR-BR),
converter converter (FR-XC) Discharging resistor
(FR-HC2) (k) Power regeneration (GZG, GRZG) Earth (Ground)
common converter (FR-CV)
: Install these options as required.

22 2. Installation and Wiring

2.1 Peripheral devices
 Refer to
Symbol Name Overview
page 1
The life of the inverter is influenced by the surrounding air temperature.
The surrounding air temperature should be as low as possible within the
permissible range. This must be noted especially when the inverter is
(a) Inverter (FR-E800) installed in an enclosure. 33, 41 2
Incorrect wiring may lead to damage of the inverter. The control signal lines
must be kept fully away from the main circuit lines to protect them from
noise.
(b) Three-phase AC power supply Must be within the permissible power supply specifications of the inverter. 120 3
Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB),
Must be selected carefully since an inrush current flows in the inverter at
(c) earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB), or 25
power ON.
fuse
Install this to ensure safety. 4
(d) Magnetic contactor (MC) Do not use this to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will shorten the life 110
of the inverter.
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor.
An AC reactor (FR-HAL) (option) is required when installing the inverter 5
(e) AC reactor (FR-HAL) near a large power supply system (500 kVA or more). Under such 109
condition, the inverter may be damaged if you do not use a reactor.
Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity.
Install this to suppress harmonics and to improve the power factor. 6
Select a reactor according to the applied motor capacity.
(f) DC reactor (FR-HEL) 97
When using a DC reactor, remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1
before connecting a DC reactor to the inverter.

(g)
Noise filter (ferrite core) (FR-BSF01, FR-
Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter. 102
7
BLF)
(h) Radio noise filter (FR-BIF) Install this to reduce the radio noise. —
Suppresses the power supply harmonics significantly. Install this as
(i) High power factor converter (FR-HC2)
required.*1
94 8
Multifunction regeneration converter (FR-
(j) 95
XC)
Provides a large braking capability. Install this as required.*2
(k)
Power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV)
96 9
(l) Brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, BU)
Allows the inverter to provide the optimal regenerative braking capability.
Resistor unit (FR-BR), discharge resistor 93
(m) Install this as required.
(GZG, GRZG)
Connect between the inverter and a personal computer with a USB (ver.
10
(n) USB connection 88
1.1) cable.
(o) Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS) Increases the braking capability. (0.4K or higher) 89
Install this to reduce the electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter.
Noise filter (ferrite core) (FR-BSF01, FR-
(p) The noise filter is effective in the range from about 0.5 to 5 MHz. A wire 102
BLF)
should be wound four turns at maximum.
(q) Induction motor Connect a squirrel-cage induction motor. —
Connect this for an application where a PM motor is driven by the load
Example)
(r) even while the inverter power is OFF. Do not open or close the contactor —
No-fuse switch (DSN type)
while the inverter is running (outputting).
(s) PM motor An IPM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply. —
*1 Not available for the FR-E800-SCE.
*2 Only the FR-XC in power regeneration mode is available for the FR-E800-SCE.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.1 Peripheral devices
23
 NOTE
• To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the motor and inverter.
• Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor, or capacitor type filter on the inverter's output side. Doing
so will cause the inverter shut off or damage the capacitor or surge suppressor. If any of the above devices is connected,
immediately remove it. When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the output side of the inverter, contact the
manufacturer of the molded case circuit breaker.
• Electromagnetic wave interference:
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency components, which may interfere with the
communication devices (such as AM radios) used near the inverter. Connect the optional radio noise filter FR-BIF (for use in
the input side only), line noise filter FR-BSF01/FR-BLF, Filterpack, or EMC filter to minimize interference.
• For details of options and peripheral devices, refer to the respective Instruction Manual.
• A PM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.
• A PM motor is a motor with permanent magnets embedded inside. High voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the
motor is running. Before closing the contactor at the output side, make sure that the inverter power is ON and the motor is
stopped.

24 2. Installation and Wiring

2.1 Peripheral devices
2.1.2 Peripheral devices 1
Check the model of the inverter you purchased. Appropriate peripheral devices must be selected according to the capacity.
Refer to the following table for right selection.
2
 Molded case circuit breaker / earth leakage circuit breaker
• This is a matrix showing the rated current of the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB)
(NF or NV type) according to the selected inverter and rating. 3
Without AC/DC power factor improving With AC/DC power factor improving
Voltage Inverter model reactor reactor

FR-E820-0008(0.1K) 5A
LD
5A
ND
5A
LD
5A
ND
4
FR-E820-0015(0.2K) 5A 5A 5A 5A
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) 10 A 5A 5A 5A
FR-E820-0050(0.75K) 15 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 5
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) 20 A 15 A 15 A 15 A
FR-E820-0110(2.2K) 30 A 20 A 20 A 15 A
Three-phase 200
V class
FR-E820-0175(3.7K)
FR-E820-0240(5.5K)
40 A
60 A
30 A
50 A
30 A
50 A
30 A
40 A
6
FR-E820-0330(7.5K) 75 A 60 A 60 A 50 A
FR-E820-0470(11K) 125 A 75 A 100 A 75 A
FR-E820-0600(15K) 150 A 125 A 125 A 100 A 7
FR-E820-0760(18.5K) 175 A 150 A 125 A 125 A
FR-E820-0900(22K) 225 A 175 A 175 A 150 A
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) 5A 5A 5A 5A
FR-E840-0026(0.75K) 10 A 5A 10 A 5A
8
FR-E840-0040(1.5K) 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
FR-E840-0060(2.2K) 20 A 15 A 15 A 10 A

Three-phase 400
FR-E840-0095(3.7K) 30 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 9
FR-E840-0120(5.5K) 40 A 30 A 30 A 20 A
V class
FR-E840-0170(7.5K) 50 A 30 A 40 A 30 A
FR-E840-0230(11K) 75 A 50 A 50 A 40 A
FR-E840-0300(15K) 100 A 60 A 60 A 50 A 10
FR-E840-0380(18.5K) 100 A 75 A 75 A 60 A
FR-E840-0440(22K) 125 A 100 A 100 A 75 A
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) — 5A — 5A
FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) — 5A — 5A
Single-phase 200 FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) — 10 A — 10 A
V class FR-E820S-0050(0.75K) — 15 A — 10 A
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) — 20 A — 20 A
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K) — 40 A — 30 A

NOTE
• Select an MCCB according to the power supply capacity.
• Install one MCCB per inverter.
MCCB INV M
MCCB INV M
• For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the document enclosed with the product
and select appropriate fuses.
• When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
• When the breaker installed on the inverter input side is shut off, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal
parts of the inverter etc. The cause of the output shutoff must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the
breaker.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.1 Peripheral devices
25
  Magnetic contactor at the inverter's input line
• This is a matrix showing the model name of the Mitsubishi magnetic contactor to be installed at the inverter's input line
according to the selected inverter and rating.
Without AC/DC power factor improving With AC/DC power factor improving
Voltage Inverter model reactor reactor
LD ND LD ND
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-E820-0015(0.2K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-E820-0050(0.75K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-E820-0110(2.2K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
Three-phase 200
FR-E820-0175(3.7K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T10 S-T10
V class
FR-E820-0240(5.5K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T21 S-T21
FR-E820-0330(7.5K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35
FR-E820-0470(11K) S-T50 S-T35 S-T50 S-T35
FR-E820-0600(15K) S-T50 S-T50 S-T50 S-T50
FR-E820-0760(18.5K) S-T65 S-T65 S-T65 S-T50
FR-E820-0900(22K) S-T100 S-T100 S-T100 S-T65
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-E840-0026(0.75K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-E840-0040(1.5K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-E840-0060(2.2K) S-T10 S-T10 S-T10 S-T10
FR-E840-0095(3.7K) S-T21 S-T10 S-T12 S-T10
Three-phase 400
FR-E840-0120(5.5K) S-T21 S-T21 S-T21 S-T12
V class
FR-E840-0170(7.5K) S-T35 S-T21 S-T21 S-T21
FR-E840-0230(11K) S-T35 S-T21 S-T35 S-T21
FR-E840-0300(15K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T21
FR-E840-0380(18.5K) S-T35 S-T35 S-T35 S-T35
FR-E840-0440(22K) S-T50 S-T35 S-T50 S-T35
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) — S-T10 — S-T10
FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) — S-T10 — S-T10
Single-phase 200 FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) — S-T10 — S-T10
V class FR-E820S-0050(0.75K) — S-T10 — S-T10
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) — S-T10 — S-T10
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K) — S-T21 — S-T10

NOTE
• The matrix shows the magnetic contactor selected according to the standards of Japan Electrical Manufacturers' Association
(JEM standards) for AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the MC is used for
emergency stops during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times. If using the MC for emergency stop during motor
driving, select the MC for the inverter input current according to the rated current against JEM 1038 standards for AC-3 class.
When installing an MC on the inverter output side to switch to the commercial-power supply operation while running a general-
purpose motor, select the MC for the rated motor current according to the rated current against JEM 1038 standards for AC-
3 class.
• When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to the
inverter model, and select cables and reactors according to the motor output.
• When the breaker installed on the inverter input side is shut off, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal
parts of the inverter etc. The cause of the output shutoff must be identified and removed before turning ON the power of the
breaker.

26 2. Installation and Wiring

2.1 Peripheral devices
2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover 1

 Removal of the front cover 2

• Example of FR-E820-0008(0.1K)

(a) (b) (c)

3

Loosen 4

(a) Loosen the screw on the front cover. (This screw cannot be removed.) 7
(b) Put a finger on the recess for the screw of the front cover and pull out the cover using its lower side as a support.
(c) With the cover removed, the control circuit terminals can be wired and the plug-in option can be installed.
8

10

2. Installation and Wiring

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
27
  Reinstallation of the front cover
• Example of FR-E820-0008(0.1K)

(a) (b) (c)

Rear of the cover

Fasten

Hooks

Hooks

本体
Sockets of the wiring cover

(a) Check the position of the hooks on the rear of the cover.
(b) Insert the hooks of the cover into the sockets of the wiring cover, and reinstall the cover to the inverter.
(c) Tighten the mounting screw of the front cover. (Tightening torque: 0.6 to 0.8 N·m)

NOTE
• Fully make sure that the front cover has been reinstalled securely. Always tighten the installation screws of the front cover.

28 2. Installation and Wiring

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
 Removal of the lower front cover
• FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher and FR-E840-0230(11K) or higher 1
(a) (b) (c)

3
Loosen

(a) Loosen the screws on the lower front cover. (These screws cannot be removed.)
(b) While holding the areas around the installation hooks on the sides of the lower front cover, pull out the cover using its upper side as a
6
support.
(c) With the lower front cover removed, wiring of the main circuit terminals and control circuit terminals can be performed.

 Reinstallation of the lower front cover

7
• FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher and FR-E840-0230(11K) or higher
(a) (b) 8

Fasten 10

(a) Install the lower front cover by inserting the upper hooks into the sockets on the inverter.
(b) Tighten the screws on the lower part of the lower front cover.

NOTE
• Fully make sure that the lower front cover is reinstalled securely. Always tighten the mounting screws of the lower front cover.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
29
  Removal of the wiring cover
• FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower and FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) or lower

Guides

Hooks

Pull out the cover along the guides in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure above.

• FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to FR-E820-0175(3.7K), FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0095(3.7K), and FR-E820S-0050(0.75K)

or higher
(a) (b)

Guides

Screwdriver

(a) Insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver into the half-hole above the "PUSH" mark on the wiring cover to push the stopper behind the
wiring cover approx. 3 mm.
(b) Pull out the cover along the guides in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure above.

• FR-E820-0240(5.5K) to FR-E820-0600(15K), FR-E840-0230(11K), and FR-E840-0300(15K)

Guides

Wiring cover

Pull out the cover along the guides in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure above.

30 2. Installation and Wiring

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
 • FR-E840-0120(5.5K) and FR-E840-0170(7.5K)

(a) (b) 1

Guides 2

Screwdriver
3
(a) Insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver into the half-hole above the "PUSH" mark on the wiring cover to push the stopper behind the
wiring cover approx. 3 mm.
(b) Pull out the cover along the guides in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure above.
4
• FR-E820-0760(18.5K), FR-E820-0900(22K), FR-E840-0380(18.5K), and FR-E840-0440(22K)
(a) (b) 5

7
Guides

Remove 8
Wiring cover

(a) Remove the mounting screws of the wiring cover. 9

(b) Pull out the cover along the guides in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure above.

 Reinstallation of the wiring cover

• FR-E820-0050(0.75K) or lower and FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) or lower
10

Guides

Hooks

Fit the cover to the inverter along the guides in the direction shown by the arrow in the figure above.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
31
 • FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to FR-E820-0175(3.7K), FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to FR-E840-0095(3.7K), and FR-E820S-0050(0.75K)
or higher

Hook

Guides

Fit the cover to the inverter along the guides, and push the hook into the socket.

• FR-E820-0240(5.5K) to FR-E820-0600(15K), FR-E840-0230(11K), and FR-E840-0300(15K)

Guides

Wiring cover
Fit the cover to the inverter along the guides.

• FR-E840-0120(5.5K) and FR-E840-0170(7.5K)

Guides

Fit the cover to the inverter along the guides.

• FR-E820-0760(18.5K), FR-E820-0900(22K), FR-E840-0380(18.5K), and FR-E840-0440(22K)

Guides

Tighten

Wiring cover
Fit the cover to the inverter along the guides.
Tighten the mounting screws of the front cover. (Tightening torque: 0.6 to 0.8 N·m)

32 2. Installation and Wiring

2.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design 1

2.3.1 Inverter installation environment 2

The following table lists the standard specifications of the inverter installation environment. Using the inverter in an environment
that does not satisfy the conditions deteriorates the performance, shortens the life, and causes a failure. Refer to the following 3
points, and take adequate measures.

 Standard environmental specifications of the inverter

Item Description
4
Measurement
position

Surrounding air temperature

-20°C to +60°C (The rated current
must be reduced at a temperature 5 cm
Inverter
5 cm
5
above 50°C. (Refer to page 36.))
Measurement 5 cm
position

With circuit board coating (conforming to IEC 60721-3-3:1994 3C2): 95% RH or less (non-
6
Ambient humidity condensing)
Without circuit board coating: 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage temperature -40°C to +70°C*1 7
Atmosphere Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Altitude Maximum 3000 m*2
Vibration 5.9 m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz (in either X, Y, or Z direction) 8
*1 Temperature applicable for a short time, for example, in transit.
*2 For installation at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated current per 500 m increase in altitude.

 Temperature 9
The permissive range of surrounding air temperature of the inverter is -20°C to +60°C. (The rated current must be reduced at
a temperature above 50°C. Refer to page 36.) Always operate the inverter within this temperature range. Operation outside
this range will considerably shorten the service lives of the semiconductors, parts, capacitors and others. Take the following 10
measures to keep the surrounding air temperature of the inverter within the specified range.

 Measures against high temperature

• Use a forced ventilation system or similar cooling system. (Refer to page 37.)
• Install the enclosure in an air-conditioned electric chamber.
• Block direct sunlight.
• Provide a shield or similar plate to avoid direct exposure to the radiated heat and wind of a heat source.
• Ventilate the area around the enclosure well.

 Measures against low temperature

• Provide a space heater in the enclosure.
• Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)

 Sudden temperature changes

• Select an installation place where temperature does not change suddenly.
• Avoid installing the inverter near the air outlet of an air conditioner.
• If temperature changes are caused by opening/closing of a door, install the inverter away from the door.

NOTE
• For the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit, refer to page 35.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
33
  Humidity
Operate the inverter within the ambient air humidity of usually 45 to 90% (up to 95% with circuit board coating). Too high
humidity will pose problems of reduced insulation and metal corrosion. On the other hand, too low humidity may cause a spatial
electrical breakdown. The humidity conditions for the insulation distance defined in JEM 1103 standard "Insulation Distance
from Control Equipment" is 45 to 85%.

 Measures against high humidity

• Make the enclosure enclosed, and provide it with a hygroscopic agent.
• Provide dry air into the enclosure from outside.
• Provide a space heater in the enclosure.

 Measures against low humidity

Air with proper humidity can be blown into the enclosure from outside. Also, when installing or inspecting the unit, discharge
your body (static electricity) beforehand, and keep your body away from the parts and patterns.

 Measures against condensation

Condensation may occur if frequent operation stops change the in-enclosure temperature suddenly or if the outside air
temperature changes suddenly.
Condensation causes such faults as reduced insulation and corrosion.
• Take the measures against high humidity.
• Do not power OFF the inverter. (Keep the start signal of the inverter OFF.)

 Dust, dirt, oil mist

Dust and dirt will cause such faults as poor contacts, reduced insulation and cooling effect due to the moisture-absorbed
accumulated dust and dirt, and in-enclosure temperature rise due to a clogged filter. In an atmosphere where conductive
powder floats, dust and dirt will cause such faults as malfunction, deteriorated insulation and short circuit in a short time.
Since oil mist will cause similar conditions, it is necessary to take adequate measures.

 Countermeasure
• Place the inverter in a totally enclosed enclosure.
Take measures if the in-enclosure temperature rises. (Refer to page 37.)
• Purge air.
Pump clean air from outside to make the in-enclosure air pressure higher than the outside air pressure.

 Corrosive gas, salt damage

If the inverter is exposed to corrosive gas or to salt near a beach, the printed board patterns and parts will corrode or the relays
and switches will result in poor contact.
In such places, take the measures given in the previous paragraph.

 Explosive, flammable gases

As the inverter is non-explosion proof, it must be contained in an explosion-proof enclosure. In places where explosion may be
caused by explosive gas, dust or dirt, an enclosure cannot be used unless it structurally complies with the guidelines and has
passed the specified tests. This makes the enclosure itself expensive (including the test charges). The best way is to avoid
installation in such places and install the inverter in a non-hazardous place.

 High altitude
Use the inverter at an altitude of within 3000 m. For use at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated
current per 500 m increase in altitude.
If it is used at a higher place, it is likely that thin air will reduce the cooling effect and low air pressure will deteriorate dielectric
strength.

 Vibration, impact
The vibration resistance of the inverter is up to 5.9 m/s2 at 10 to 55 Hz frequency and 1 mm amplitude for the directions of X,
Y, Z axes. Applying vibration and impacts for a long time may loosen the structures and cause poor contacts of connectors,
even if those vibration and impacts are within the specified values.
Especially when impacts are applied repeatedly, caution must be taken because such impacts may break the installation feet.

34 2. Installation and Wiring

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
 Countermeasure
• Provide the enclosure with rubber vibration isolators.
1
• Strengthen the structure to prevent the enclosure from resonance.
• Install the enclosure away from the sources of the vibration.

2
2.3.2 Amount of heat generated by the inverter
 Installing the heat sink inside the enclosure
When the heat sink is installed inside the enclosure, the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit is shown in the following
3
table.
Amount of heat generated (W) 4
Ethernet model / Safety
Voltage Inverter model Standard model
communication model
LD ND LD ND
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) 16 11 17 12 5
FR-E820-0015(0.2K) 21 16 22 17
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) 35 29 36 30
FR-E820-0050(0.75K)
FR-E820-0080(1.5K)
61
91
48
74
62
92
49
75
6
Three- FR-E820-0110(2.2K) 107 91 108 92
phase 200 V FR-E820-0175(3.7K) 177 153 178 154
class FR-E820-0240(5.5K) 251 191 252 192 7
FR-E820-0330(7.5K) 317 249 318 250
FR-E820-0470(11K) 426 341 427 342
FR-E820-0600(15K) 547 414 548 415
FR-E820-0760(18.5K) 735 600 736 601
8
FR-E820-0900(22K) 1063 745 1064 746
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) 33 25 34 26
FR-E840-0026(0.75K) 55 38 56 39 9
FR-E840-0040(1.5K) 84 58 85 59
FR-E840-0060(2.2K) 88 75 89 76
FR-E840-0095(3.7K) 136 112 137 113
Three-
phase 400 V FR-E840-0120(5.5K) 223 136 224 137 10
class FR-E840-0170(7.5K) 299 197 300 198
FR-E840-0230(11K) 410 239 411 240
FR-E840-0300(15K) 486 321 487 322
FR-E840-0380(18.5K) 510 348 511 349
FR-E840-0440(22K) 589 401 590 402
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) — 11 — 12
FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) — 17 — 18
Single- FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) — 32 — 33
phase 200 V
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K) — 49 — 50
class
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) — 80 — 81
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K) — 95 — 96

NOTE
• The figures indicate the amount of heat generated when the output current is the rated current, power supply voltage is 220 V
(200 V class) or 440 V (400 V class), and the carrier frequency is 1 kHz.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
35
  Installing the heat sink outside the enclosure
When the heat sink is installed outside the enclosure, the amount of heat generated by the inverter unit is shown in the following
table.
Amount of heat generated (W)
Ethernet model / Safety communication
Standard model
model
Voltage Inverter model Heat sink section Heat sink section
Control section Control section
(outside of (outside of
(inside of enclosure) (inside of enclosure)
enclosure) enclosure)
LD ND LD ND LD ND LD ND
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) 63.7 51.8 27.3 22.2 63.7 51.8 28.3 23.2
Three- FR-E820-0110(2.2K) 74.9 63.7 32.1 27.3 74.9 63.7 33.1 28.3
phase 200 V FR-E820-0175(3.7K) 123.9 107.1 53.1 45.9 123.9 107.1 54.1 46.9
class FR-E820-0240(5.5K) 175.7 133.7 75.3 57.3 175.7 133.7 76.3 58.3
FR-E820-0330(7.5K) 221.9 174.3 95.1 74.7 221.9 174.3 96.1 75.7
FR-E840-0040(1.5K) 80.5 56.7 34.5 24.3 80.5 56.7 35.5 25.3
Three- FR-E840-0060(2.2K) 95.2 82.6 40.8 35.4 95.2 82.6 41.8 36.4
phase 400 V FR-E840-0095(3.7K) 142.8 120.4 61.2 51.6 142.8 120.4 62.2 52.6
class FR-E840-0120(5.5K) 241.5 156.8 103.5 67.2 241.5 156.8 104.5 68.2
FR-E840-0170(7.5K) 333.2 231.0 142.8 99.0 333.2 231.0 143.8 100.0
Single- FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) — 56.0 — 24.0 — 56.0 — 25.0
phase 200 V — 66.5 — 28.5 — 66.5 — 29.5
class FR-E820S-0110(2.2K)

NOTE
• The figures indicate the amount of heat generated when the output current is the rated current, power supply voltage is 220 V
(200 V class) or 440 V (400 V class), and the carrier frequency is 1 kHz (200 V class) or 14.5 kHz (400 V class).
• When the heat sink is installed outside the enclosure, the FR-E8CN panel through attachment option is required.

2.3.3 Output current reduction when the surrounding air

temperature is between 50°C and 60°C
When the surrounding air temperature is between 50°C and 60°C, reduce the rated output current as shown in the following
table.
Output current reduction ratio (%/ Output current reduction ratio (%/
°C) °C)
Voltage Inverter model
(carrier frequency: 1 kHz) (carrier frequency: 2 to 14.5 kHz)
LD ND LD ND
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.5
FR-E820-0015(0.2K) 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.5
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.5
Three- FR-E820-0050(0.75K) 2.0 1.0 2.0 1.5
phase 200 V FR-E820-0080(1.5K) 1.5 1.0 2.5 2.5
class FR-E820-0110(2.2K) 1.5 1.0 2.5 2.5
FR-E820-0175(3.7K) 1.5 1.0 2.5 2.5
FR-E820-0240(5.5K) 1.5 1.0 2.0 2.0
FR-E820-0330(7.5K) 1.5 1.0 2.0 2.0
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) 2.5 1.0 2.0 1.0
FR-E840-0026(0.75K) 2.5 1.0 2.0 1.0
Three- FR-E840-0040(1.5K) 1.5 1.0 3.0 3.0
phase 400 V FR-E840-0060(2.2K) 1.5 1.0 3.0 3.0
class FR-E840-0095(3.7K) 1.5 1.0 3.0 3.0
FR-E840-0120(5.5K) 1.0 1.0 3.0 3.0
FR-E840-0170(7.5K) 1.0 1.0 3.0 3.0

36 2. Installation and Wiring

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
 NOTE
• Do not use the inverter in an environment with the surrounding air temperature exceeding 60°C. 1
• [Calculation example] When the FR-E820-0080(1.5K) inverter is used with the ND rating in an environment with the
surrounding air temperature of 55°C and the carrier frequency of 1 kHz, the output current reduction ratio is 1.0%. The rated
output current after the reduction is 7.6 A against the rated output current 8.0 A for the ND rating according to the reduction
using the following formula: output current reduction ratio 1.0% × (55°C - 50°C) = 5%.
2

2.3.4 Standby power consumption by the inverter 3

The following table shows the standby power consumption during a stop.
Standby power consumption (W)
Voltage Inverter model
Light duty Heavy duty
4
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) 4.3 11.0
FR-E820-0015(0.2K) 4.3 11.0
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) 4.3 11.5 5
Three- FR-E820-0050(0.75K) 4.3 11.6
phase 200 V FR-E820-0080(1.5K) 4.4 13.6
class FR-E820-0110(2.2K) 4.5 13.8
FR-E820-0175(3.7K) 4.9 14.4 6
FR-E820-0240(5.5K) 7.9 22.0
FR-E820-0330(7.5K) 7.6 22.1
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) 6.8 14.3 7
FR-E840-0026(0.75K) 6.8 14.2
Three- FR-E840-0040(1.5K) 7.0 16.1
phase 400 V FR-E840-0060(2.2K) 9.6 17.3
class FR-E840-0095(3.7K) 9.9 17.5 8
FR-E840-0120(5.5K) 10.0 22.2
FR-E840-0170(7.5K) 10.1 22.2

9
NOTE
• Operation of the inverter alone is assumed for the standby power consumption with the light load.
• Operation of the inverter, FR-PU07, fan, and a plug-in option is assumed for the standby power consumption with the heavy
load.
10

2.3.5 Cooling system types for inverter enclosure

From the enclosure that contains the inverter, the heat of the inverter and other equipment (transformers, lamps, resistors, etc.)
and the incoming heat such as direct sunlight must be dissipated to keep the in-enclosure temperature lower than the
permissible temperatures of the in-enclosure equipment including the inverter.
The cooling systems are classified as follows in terms of the cooling calculation method.
• Cooling by natural heat dissipation from the enclosure surface (totally enclosed type)
• Cooling by heat sink (aluminum fin, etc.)
• Cooling by ventilation (forced ventilation type, pipe ventilation type)

2. Installation and Wiring

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
37
 • Cooling by heat exchanger or cooler (heat pipe, cooler, etc.)
Cooling system Enclosure structure Comment

This system is low in cost and generally used, but the

Natural ventilation (enclosed
enclosure size increases as the inverter capacity
type / open type) INV
increases. This system is for relatively small capacities.

Natural
Being a totally enclosed type, this system is the most
Natural ventilation (totally appropriate for hostile environment having dust, dirt, oil
enclosed type) mist, etc. The enclosure size increases depending on
INV the inverter capacity.

This system has restrictions on the heat sink mounting

Heat sink
Heat sink cooling position and area. This system is for relatively small
INV
capacities.

This system is for general indoor installation. This is

Forced ventilation appropriate for enclosure downsizing and cost
Forced air INV reduction, and often used.

Heat
pipe This system is a totally enclosed type, and is
Heat pipe
appropriate for enclosure downsizing.
INV

2.3.6 Inverter installation

 Inverter placement

FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or lower FR-E820-0240(5.5K) or higher

FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0170(7.5K) FR-E840-0230(11K) or higher
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to 0110(2.2K)

Front cover

Front cover
(lower side)

Comb-shaped wiring cover Comb-shaped wiring cover

• Remove the front cover (or the lower front cover) and wiring cover to fix the inverter.
• Install the inverter on a strong surface securely with screws.
• Leave enough clearances and take cooling measures.
• Avoid places where the inverter is subjected to direct sunlight, high temperature and high humidity.
• Install the inverter on a nonflammable wall surface.
• When encasing multiple inverters in an enclosure, install them in parallel as a cooling measure.

38 2. Installation and Wiring

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
 • For heat dissipation and maintenance, keep clearance between the inverter and the other devices or enclosure surface.
The clearance below the inverter is required as a wiring space, and the clearance above the inverter is required as a heat
dissipation space.
1
Clearances (front) Clearances (side)

10 cm
or more
2

3
1 cm 1 cm 1 cm
Vertical or more or more or more
*1*2 *1*2

Allow clearance. 10 cm
or more
4

*1 When using the inverters at the surrounding air temperature of 40°C or less, the inverters can be installed closely attached (0 cm clearance). 5
*2 A clearance of 5 cm or more is required for the FR-E820-0470(11K) or higher and the FR-E840-0230(11K) or higher.
• When tightening screws into the upper mounting holes, tilt the screwdriver seven to ten degrees (FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to
0050(0.75K), and FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) or lower)
Screwdriver
6
Screwdriver length: 135 mm or longer

7° to 10°
7

9
• When designing or building an enclosure for the inverter, carefully consider influencing factors such as heat generation of
the contained devices and the operating environment. 10
 Installation orientation of the inverter
Install the inverter on a wall as specified. Do not mount it horizontally or in any other way.

 Above the inverter

Heat is blown up from inside the inverter by the small fan built in the unit. Any equipment placed above the inverter should be
heat resistant.

 Arrangement of multiple inverters

When multiple inverters are placed in the same enclosure, generally arrange them horizontally as shown in the figure (a). When
it is inevitable to arrange them vertically to minimize space, take such measures as to provide guides between the inverters
since heat generated in the inverters in bottom row can increase the temperatures in the inverters in top row, causing inverter
failures.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
39
 When installing multiple inverters, fully take measures to prevent the surrounding air temperature of the inverter from being
higher than the permissible value by providing ventilation or increasing the enclosure size.

Inverter Inverter Inverter Inverter

Guide Guide Guide

Inverter Inverter

Enclosure Enclosure
(a) Horizontal arrangement (b) Vertical arrangement

Arrangement of multiple inverters

 Arrangement of the ventilation fan and inverter

Heat generated in the inverter is blown up from the bottom of the unit as warm air by the cooling fan. When installing a
ventilation fan for that heat, determine the place of ventilation fan installation after fully considering an air flow. (Air passes
through areas of low resistance. Make an airway and airflow plates to expose the inverter to cool air.)

Inverter Inverter

<Good example> <Bad example>

Arrangement of the ventilation fan and inverter

40 2. Installation and Wiring

2.3 Installation of the inverter and enclosure design
2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
1
 Standard model (sink logic)
Main circuit terminal
2
Control circuit terminal
Single-phase power input DC reactor Brake unit

Single-phase
MCCB MC
R/L1
(FR-HEL)
 R
(Option)
3
AC power S/L2 Earth

supply (Ground)

4
Jumper PR N/-

MCCB MC P1 P/+ 
Motor
R/L1 U
Three-phase S/L2 V
AC power
supply
T/L3 W
M
5
Earth (Ground)
Earth Main circuit
(Ground)
Control circuit 6
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)  C Relay output 
Forward STF
rotation start
Reverse STR
B Relay output
(Fault output)
7
rotation start A
RH
High

8
speed Open collector output 
RM
Multi-speed selection Middle
speed RUN
RL
Low Running
speed
MRS
Output
stop
SOURCE SINK SINK FU
Frequency detection 9
RES
Reset 
Common for external SE Open collector output common
SD SOURCE
power supply transistor 24V Sink/source common
Contact input common
(24VDC power supply) PC 10
Safety stop input common Safety stop signal
SO
S1 Safety monitor output
Safety stop input (Channel 1) Output
S2 shutoff SOC
Safety stop input (Channel 2) Safety monitor output common
circuit
Shorting wire

Frequency setting signals (Analog) Output signal: Pulse or analog selectable

3 10(+5V)
Output signal: Pulse (for the inverter with terminal FM)
Frequency
setting PU
2 2 0 to 5VDC connector Calibration Indicator
potentiometer 0 to 10VDC resistor + - (Frequency meter, etc.)
1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC  USB mini B
 FM Moving-coil type
1 5(Analog common) connector 1mA full-scale

SD
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC
(Current input) (-) 0 to 5VDC 
0 to 10VDC
2 Output signal: Analog (for the inverter with terminal AM)
V I AM (+)
Analog signal output
4
(-) (0 to ±10VDC)
Voltage/current
input switch  5

Connector for
plug-in option connection Option connector

*1 Remove the jumper between P1 and P/+ to connect the DC reactor.

*2 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.184). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
*3 The initial setting varies depending on the specification.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
41
 *4 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input voltage, set the voltage/current
input selection switch to "V". To input current, set the switch to "I". The initial setting varies depending on the specification. (Refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).)
*5 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
*6 The FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) are not equipped with brake transistors.
*7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)
Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (A brake resistor cannot be connected to the FR-E820-0008(0.1K),
FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K).) (Refer to page 89.)
*8 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Pr.192 ABC terminal function selection.
*9 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.190 or Pr.191). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
*10 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.

NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
• Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.
• The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200 V.

42 2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
 Standard model (source logic)
Main circuit terminal
1
Control circuit terminal
Single-phase power input DC reactor Brake unit

Single-phase
MCCB MC
R/L1
(FR-HEL)
 R
(Option)
2
AC power S/L2 Earth

supply (Ground)

3
Jumper PR N/-

MCCB MC P1 P/+ 
Motor
R/L1 U
Three-phase S/L2 V
4
AC power M
T/L3 W
supply

Earth (Ground)
Earth Main circuit
5
(Ground)
Control circuit
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)  C Relay output 
Forward STF
rotation start
Reverse STR
B Relay output
(Fault output)
6
rotation start A
RH
High

7
speed Open collector output 
RM
Multi-speed selection Middle
speed RUN
RL
Low Running
speed
MRS
Output
stop
SOURCE SINK SINK FU
Frequency detection 8
RES
Reset 
Common for external SE Open collector output common
SD SOURCE
power supply transistor 24V Sink/source common
Contact input common
(24VDC power supply) PC 9
Safety stop input common Safety stop signal
SO
S1 Safety monitor output
Safety stop input (Channel 1)
Safety stop input (Channel 2)
S2
Output
shutoff SOC
Safety monitor output common
10
circuit
Shorting wire

Frequency setting signals (Analog) Output signal: Pulse or analog selectable

3 10(+5V)
Output signal: Pulse (for the inverter with terminal FM)
Frequency
setting PU
2 2 0 to 5VDC connector Calibration Indicator
potentiometer 0 to 10VDC resistor + - (Frequency meter, etc.)
1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC  USB mini B
 FM Moving-coil type
1 5(Analog common) connector 1mA full-scale

SD
Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC
(Current input) (-) 0 to 5VDC 
0 to 10VDC
2 Output signal: Analog (for the inverter with terminal AM)
V I AM (+)
Analog signal output
4
(-) (0 to ±10VDC)
Voltage/current
input switch  5

Connector for
plug-in option connection Option connector

*1 Remove the jumper between P1 and P/+ to connect the DC reactor.

*2 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.184). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
*3 The initial setting varies depending on the specification.
*4 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input voltage, set the voltage/current
input selection switch to "V". To input current, set the switch to "I". The initial setting varies depending on the specification. (Refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).)
*5 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
43
 *6 The FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) are not equipped with brake transistors.
*7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)
Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (A brake resistor cannot be connected to the FR-E820-0008(0.1K),
FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K).) (Refer to page 89.)
*8 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Pr.192 ABC terminal function selection.
*9 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Output terminal function selection (Pr.190 or Pr.191). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
*10 Not required when calibrating the scale with the operation panel.

NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
• Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.
• The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200 V.

44 2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
 Ethernet model (sink logic)
Main circuit terminal 1
Control circuit terminal
Single-phase power input DC reactor Brake unit
MCCB MC (FR-HEL) (Option)

Single-phase R/L1  R 2
AC power S/L2 Earth

supply (Ground)
Jumper PR N/-

MCCB MC P1 P/+  3
Motor
R/L1 U
Three-phase S/L2 V
AC power M
supply
T/L3 W
4
Earth (Ground)
Earth Main circuit
(Ground)
Control circuit 5
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)  C Relay output 
Forward DI0
rotation start B
Reverse DI1
Relay output
(Fault output) 6
rotation start A

SOURCE SINK
SINK 7
Common for 
SD
external power supply transistor
SOURCE

Contact input common PC

24V
8
24VDC power supply
Safety stop input common Safety stop signal

9
Output SO
S1 Safety monitor output
Safety stop input (Channel 1) shutoff
S2 circuit SOC
Safety stop input (Channel 2) Safety monitor output common
Shorting wire

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

3 10(+5V) Ethernet 10
Frequency connector
setting 2 0 to 5VDC
2 Ethernet
potentiometer 0 to 5VDC
1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC  connector
 5(Analog common) USB mini B
1
connector

Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC

(Current input) (-) 0 to 5VDC 
0 to 10VDC
2
V I
4

Voltage/current
input switch 
Connector for
plug-in option connection Option connector

*1 Remove the jumper between P1 and P/+ to connect the DC reactor.

*2 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.179). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
*3 The initial setting varies depending on the specification.
*4 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input voltage, set the voltage/current
input selection switch to "V". To input current, set the switch to "I". The initial setting varies depending on the specification. (Refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).)
*5 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
*6 The FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) are not equipped with brake transistors.
*7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)
Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (A brake resistor cannot be connected to the FR-E820-0008(0.1K),
FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K).) (Refer to page 89.)
*8 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Pr.192 ABC terminal function selection.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
45
 NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
• Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.
• The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200 V.

46 2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
 Ethernet model (source logic)
Main circuit terminal 1
Control circuit terminal
Single-phase power input DC reactor Brake unit
MCCB MC (FR-HEL) (Option)

Single-phase R/L1  R 2
AC power S/L2 Earth

supply (Ground)
Jumper PR N/-

MCCB MC P1 P/+  3
Motor
R/L1 U
Three-phase S/L2 V
AC power M
supply
T/L3 W
4
Earth (Ground)
Earth Main circuit
(Ground)
Control circuit 5
Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)  C Relay output 
Forward DI0
rotation start B
Reverse DI1
Relay output
(Fault output) 6
rotation start A

SOURCE SINK
SINK 7
Common for 
SD
external power supply transistor
SOURCE

Contact input common PC

24V
8
24VDC power supply
Safety stop input common Safety stop signal

9
Output SO
S1 Safety monitor output
Safety stop input (Channel 1) shutoff
S2 circuit SOC
Safety stop input (Channel 2) Safety monitor output common
Shorting wire

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

3 10(+5V) Ethernet 10
Frequency connector
setting 2 0 to 5VDC
2 Ethernet
potentiometer 0 to 5VDC
1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC  connector
 5(Analog common) USB mini B
1
connector

Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC

(Current input) (-) 0 to 5VDC 
0 to 10VDC
2
V I
4

Voltage/current
input switch 
Connector for
plug-in option connection Option connector

*1 Remove the jumper between P1 and P/+ to connect the DC reactor.

*2 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Input terminal function selection (Pr.178 to Pr.179). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction
Manual (Function).)
*3 The initial setting varies depending on the specification.
*4 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input voltage, set the voltage/current
input selection switch to "V". To input current, set the switch to "I". The initial setting varies depending on the specification. (Refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).)
*5 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
*6 The FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) are not equipped with brake transistors.
*7 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)
Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (A brake resistor cannot be connected to the FR-E820-0008(0.1K),
FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K).) (Refer to page 89.)
*8 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Pr.192 ABC terminal function selection.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
47
 NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
• Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.
• The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200 V.

48 2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
 Safety communication model (source logic)
Main circuit terminal 1
Control circuit terminal
Single-phase power input DC reactor Brake unit
MCCB MC (FR-HEL) (Option)

Single-phase R/L1  R 2
AC power S/L2 Earth

supply (Ground)
Jumper PR N/-

MCCB MC P1 P/+  3
Motor
R/L1 U
Three-phase S/L2 V
AC power M
supply
T/L3 W
4
Earth (Ground)
Earth Main circuit
(Ground)
Control circuit 5
C Relay output 

B Relay output
(Fault output) 6
A

7
Safety communication function selection
24V
24 VDC power supply PC
Safety input terminal common
SY1
Safety output (channel 1) 8
Safety input (channel 1) SX1 SC1
Safety output common (channel 1)
Safety input (channel 2) SX2
SY2

24 VDC power supply common SD

Safety output (channel 2)
9
SC2
Safety output common (channel 2)

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

3 10(+5V)
Ethernet
connector
10
Frequency
setting 2 0 to 5VDC Ethernet
2
potentiometer 0 to 5VDC connector
1/2W1kΩ 0 to 20mADC 
 5(Analog common) USB mini B
1 connector

Terminal 4 input (+) 4 4 to 20mADC

(Current input) (-) 0 to 5VDC 
0 to 10VDC
2
V I
4

Voltage/current
input switch 
Connector for
plug-in option connection Option connector

*1 Remove the jumper between P1 and P/+ to connect the DC reactor.

*2 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog input specification switchover (Pr.73, Pr.267). To input voltage, set the voltage/current
input selection switch to "V". To input current, set the switch to "I". The initial setting varies depending on the specification. (Refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).)
*3 It is recommended to use 2 W 1 kΩ when the frequency setting signal is changed frequently.
*4 The FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K) are not equipped with brake transistors.
*5 Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)
Install a thermal relay to prevent overheating and damage of brake resistors. (A brake resistor cannot be connected to the FR-E820-0008(0.1K),
FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K).) (Refer to page 89.)
*6 The function of these terminals can be changed using the Pr.192 ABC terminal function selection.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
49
 NOTE
• To prevent a malfunction due to noise, keep the signal cables 10 cm or more away from the power cables. Also, keep the
cables of the main circuit for input and output separated.
• After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean.
When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.
• Set the switches of the voltage/current input selection switch assembly correctly. Incorrect setting may cause a fault, failure or
malfunction.
• The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200 V.

50 2. Installation and Wiring

2.4 Terminal connection diagrams
2.5 Main circuit terminals 1

2.5.1 Details on the main circuit terminals 2

Refer to
Terminal symbol Terminal name Terminal function description
page 3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3*1 AC power input Connect these terminals to the commercial power supply. —
Connect these terminals to a three-phase squirrel cage motor or a PM
U, V, W Inverter output —
motor. 4
Connect an optional brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, or MYS model)
across terminals P/+ and PR. (A brake resistor cannot be connected to
P/+, PR Brake resistor connection for 89
the FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-
0008(0.1K), and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K).)
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2, FR-BU, or BU), power regeneration
5
P/+, N/- Brake unit connection common converter (FR-CV), or multifunction regeneration converter 93
(FR-XC in power regeneration mode) to these terminals.
Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1, and connect a DC
reactor.
6
P/+, P1 DC reactor connection for 97
When a DC reactor is not connected, the jumper across terminals P/+
and P1 should not be removed.

Earth (ground)
For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Be sure to earth (ground)
58 7
the inverter.
*1 Terminal T/L3 is not available for the single-phase power input model.

8
2.5.2 Main circuit terminal layout and wiring to power
supply and motor
9
 Three-phase 200/400 V class
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0050(0.75K)
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to 0175(3.7K)
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0095(3.7K)
10
Jumper
N/- P/+ Jumper

N/- P/+ PR R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

PR
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

Earthing (grounding)
terminal M
Earthing (grounding) Power supply Motor
terminal M
Power supply Motor

2. Installation and Wiring

2.5 Main circuit terminals
51
 FR-E820-0240(5.5K), 0330(7.5K) FR-E840-0120(5.5K), 0170(7.5K)
Jumper
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

N/- P/+ PR

Earthing (grounding) Earthing (grounding)

terminal M terminal
Power supply Motor

N/- PR
P/+
Jumper

Earthing (grounding)
terminal M
Power supply Motor
FR-E820-0470(11K), 0600(15K) FR-E840-0230(11K), 0300(15K)

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 N/- P/+ PR Jumper

N/- P/+ PR R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

Jumper

M
Power supply Motor M
Earthing (grounding)
terminal Power supply Motor
Earthing (grounding)
terminal
FR-E820-0760(18.5K), 0900(22K)
FR-E840-0380(18.5K), 0440(22K)

Jumper PR

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

P/+ N/-

M
Power supply Motor
Earthing (grounding)
terminal

52 2. Installation and Wiring

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 Single-phase 200 V class
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) FR-E820S-0050(0.75K) to 0110(2.2K) 1
Jumper
N/- P/+ Jumper
2
N/- P/+ PR R/L1 S/L2
3
PR
R/L1 S/L2
4
Earthing (grounding)
terminal M
Earthing (grounding) Power supply Motor
terminal M 5
Power supply Motor

NOTE 6
• Make sure the power cables are connected to the R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. (Phase need not be matched.) Never connect the
power cable to the U, V, and W of the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter.
• Connect the motor to U, V, and W. (The phases must be matched.)
7
 Handling of the wiring cover
(FR-E820-0470(11K) to 0900(22K), FR-E840-0230(11K) to 0440(22K)) 8
For the hook of the wiring cover, cut off the necessary parts using a pair of needle-nose pliers etc.

NOTE 9
• Cut off the same number of lugs as wires. If parts where no wire is put through have been cut off (10 mm or more), protective
structure (IEC 60529) becomes an open type (IP00).

10

2. Installation and Wiring

2.5 Main circuit terminals
53
 2.5.3 Applicable cables and wiring length
 For the ND rating
• Three-phase 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp Cable gauge

Applicable Terminal Tightening terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-E820-[] size*4 (N·m)
S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
0008(0.1K) to
0050(0.75K)
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2*5 2 2 14 14*5 2.5 2.5*5 2.5

0080(1.5K), M4
1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0110(2.2K) (M3.5)
M4
0175(3.7K) 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
(M3.5)
0240(5.5K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
0330(7.5K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 8 5.5 6 8 16 10 6
0470(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
0600(15K) M6 (M5) 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
0760(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 22-8 38 22 38 14 2 4 35 25 25
0900(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
• Three-phase 200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp Cable gauge

Applicable Terminal Tightening terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-E820-[] size*4 (N·m)
S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
0008(0.1K) to
0050(0.75K)
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2*5 2 2 14 14*5 2.5 2.5*5 2.5

0080(1.5K), M4
1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0110(2.2K) (M3.5)
M4
0175(3.7K) 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
(M3.5)
0240(5.5K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
0330(7.5K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 5.5 8 8 10 10 6
0470(11K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 16
0600(15K) M6 (M5) 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
0760(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 22-8 22-8 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 25
0900(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
• Three-phase 400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp Cable gauge

Applicable Terminal Tightening terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-E840-[] size*4 (N·m)
S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
0016(0.4K) to
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0095(3.7K)
0120(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 2-4 3.5 2 3.5 3.5 12 14 4 2.5 4
0170(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
0230(11K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 10
0300(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 5.5 8 8 10 10 10
0380(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 8-6 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16
0440(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16

54 2. Installation and Wiring

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 • Three-phase 400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp Cable gauge 1

Applicable Terminal Tightening terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-E840-[] size*4 (N·m)
S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)

0016(0.4K) to
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
2
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0095(3.7K)
0120(5.5K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0170(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 3
0230(11K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
0300(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 8 5.5 8 8 10 10 10
0380(18.5K) M6 4.4 8-6 8-6 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 10
0440(22K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 4
• Single-phase 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Applicable Terminal Tightening

Crimp
terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1
Cable gauge
AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
5
inverter model screw torque
Earthing Earthing
FR-E820-[] size*4 (N·m) R/L1, R/L1, R/L1, R/L1,
U, V, W U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) U, V, W U, V, W (grounding)
S/L2 S/L2 S/L2 S/L2
cable cable
0008(0.1K) to
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2*5 2 2 14 14*5 2.5 2.5*5 2.5
6
0030(0.4K)
0050(0.75K),
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0080(1.5K)
0110(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 2-4 3.5 2 2 2 12 14 4 2.5 2.5 7
• Single-phase 200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Applicable Terminal Tightening

Crimp
terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1
Cable gauge
AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
8
inverter model screw torque
Earthing Earthing
FR-E820-[] size*4 (N·m) R/L1, R/L1, R/L1, R/L1,
U, V, W U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) U, V, W U, V, W (grounding)
S/L2 S/L2 S/L2 S/L2
cable cable
0008(0.1K) to 9
0030(0.4K)
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2*5 2 2 14 14*5 2.5 2.5*5 2.5

0050(0.75K),
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0080(1.5K)
0110(2.2K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 2-4 3.5 2 2 2 12 14 4 2.5 2.5 10
*1 The cable size is that of the HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 75°C. It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 50°C or lower and the wiring distance of 20 m or shorter.
*2 The cable size is that of the THHW cable with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. It assumes a surrounding air temperature
of 40°C or lower and the wiring distance of 20 m or shorter.
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the document enclosed with the product.)
*3 The cable size is that of the PVC cable with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C. It assumes a surrounding air temperature of
40°C or lower and the wiring distance of 20 m or shorter.
(Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 The screw size for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the earthing (grounding) terminal is shown.
The screw size for earthing (grounding) the FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to 0175(3.7K) or FR-E820-0600(15K) to FR-E820-0900(22K) is indicated in
parentheses.
*5 The gauge is 0.75 mm2 (19 AWG or 18 AWG) for the MM-GKR motor power supply cable (MR-PWS1CBL[]M-A[]-[]).
When the wiring length of the power supply cable for the MM-GKR motor exceeds 10 m, extend the cable using the MR-PWS2CBL03M-A_-L and
an HIV wire of 1.25 mm2 (16 AWG).

2. Installation and Wiring

2.5 Main circuit terminals
55
  For the LD rating
• Three-phase 200 V class (220 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp Cable gauge

Applicable Terminal Tightening terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*1 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-E820-[] size*4 (N·m)
S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
0008(0.1K) to
0050(0.75K)
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2*5 2 2 14 14*5 2.5 2.5*5 2.5

M4
0080(1.5K) 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
(M3.5)
M4
0110(2.2K) 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
(M3.5)
M4
0175(3.7K) 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
(M3.5)
0240(5.5K) M5 2.5 14-5 5.5-5 14 5.5 14 5.5 6 10 16 6 6
0330(7.5K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 10
0470(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
0600(15K) M6 4.4 38-6 22-6 38 22 38 14 2 4 35 25 25
0760(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
0900(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25

• Three-phase 200 V class (220 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp Cable gauge

Applicable Terminal Tightening terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*4 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-E820-[] size*4 (N·m)
S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
0008(0.1K) to
0050(0.75K)
M3.5 1.2 2-3.5 2-3.5 2 2*5 2 2 14 14*5 2.5 2.5*5 2.5

M4
0080(1.5K) 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
(M3.5)
M4
0110(2.2K) 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
(M3.5)
M4
0175(3.7K) 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
(M3.5)
0240(5.5K) M5 2.5 5.5-5 5.5-5 5.5 5.5 14 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
0330(7.5K) M5 2.5 14-5 14-5 14 14 14 8 6 6 16 16 10
0470(11K) M5 2.5 22-5 22-5 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16
0600(15K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 38 14 4 4 25 25 25
0760(18.5K) M8 (M6) 7.8 38-8 38-8 38 38 38 22 2 2 35 35 25
0900(22K) M8 (M6) 7.8 60-8 60-8 60 60 60 22 1/0 1/0 50 50 25

• Three-phase 400 V class (440 V input power supply, without a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp Cable gauge

Applicable Terminal Tightening terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*4 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-E840-[] size*4 (N·m)
S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
0016(0.4K) to
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0060(2.2K)
0095(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 2 12 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0120(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4
0170(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
0230(11K) M4 1.5 8-4 5.5-4 8 5.5 8 5.5 8 10 10 6 10
0300(15K) M5 2.5 14-5 8-5 14 8 14 8 6 8 16 10 16
0380(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16
0440(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16

56 2. Installation and Wiring

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 • Three-phase 400 V class (440 V input power supply, with a power factor improving AC or DC reactor)

Crimp Cable gauge 1

Applicable Terminal Tightening terminal HIV cables, etc. (mm2)*4 AWG/MCM*2 PVC cables, etc. (mm2)*3
inverter model screw torque
R/L1, R/L1, Earthing R/L1, R/L1, Earthing
FR-E840-[] size*4 (N·m)
S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W P/+, P1 (grounding) S/L2, U, V, W S/L2, U, V, W (grounding)

0016(0.4K) to
T/L3 T/L3 cable T/L3 T/L3 cable
2
M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 2 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0060(2.2K)
0095(3.7K) M4 1.5 2-4 2-4 2 2 3.5 2 14 14 2.5 2.5 2.5
0120(5.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 12 12 4 4 4 3
0170(7.5K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 5.5 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
0230(11K) M4 1.5 5.5-4 5.5-4 5.5 5.5 8 5.5 10 10 6 6 6
0300(15K) M5 2.5 8-5 8-5 8 8 14 8 8 8 10 10 10
0380(18.5K) M6 4.4 14-6 14-6 14 14 22 14 6 6 16 16 16 4
0440(22K) M6 4.4 22-6 22-6 22 22 22 14 4 4 25 25 16

*1 The cable size is that of the HIV cable (600 V grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wire) etc. with continuous maximum permissible temperature
of 75°C. It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 50°C or lower and the wiring distance of 20 m or shorter. 5
*2 The cable size is that of the THHW cable with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. It assumes a surrounding air temperature
of 40°C or lower and the wiring distance of 20 m or shorter.
(For the use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the document enclosed with the product.)
*3 The cable size is that of the PVC cable with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 70°C. It assumes a surrounding air temperature of 6
40°C or lower and the wiring distance of 20 m or shorter.
(Selection example mainly for use in Europe.)
*4 The screw size for terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U, V, W, PR, P/+, N/-, and P1, and the earthing (grounding) terminal is shown.
The screw size for earthing (grounding) the FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to 0175(3.7K), FR-E820-0760(18.5K), or FR-E820-0900(22K) is indicated in 7
parentheses.
*5 The gauge is 0.75 mm2 (19 AWG or 18 AWG) for the MM-GKR motor power supply cable (MR-PWS1CBL[]M-A[]-[]).
When the wiring length of the power supply cable for the MM-GKR motor exceeds 10 m, extend the cable using the MR-PWS2CBL03M-A_-L and
an HIV wire of 1.25 mm2 (16 AWG). 8
The line voltage drop can be calculated by the following formula:

× wire resistance [mΩ/m] × wiring distance [m] × current [A]

Line voltage drop [V] =
1000 9
Use a larger diameter cable when the wiring distance is long or when it is desired to decrease the voltage drop (torque
reduction) in the low speed range.
10
NOTE
• Tighten the terminal screw to the specified torque.
A screw that has been tightened too loosely can cause a short circuit or malfunction.
A screw that has been tightened too tightly can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the unit breakage.
• Use crimp terminals with insulation sleeves to wire the power supply and motor.

 Total wiring length

 With induction motor
Connect one or more general-purpose motors within the total wiring length shown in the following table.
Pr.72 setting Voltage 3.7K or
Cable type 0.1K 0.2K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K
(carrier frequency) class higher
200 V 200 m 200 m 300 m 500 m 500 m 500 m 500 m
1 (1 kHz) or lower
400 V — — 200 m 200 m 300 m 500 m 500 m
Unshielded
200 V 30 m 100 m 200 m 300 m 500 m 500 m 500 m
2 (2 kHz) or higher
400 V — — 30 m 100 m 200 m 200 m 500 m
200 V 50 m 50 m 75 m 100 m 100 m 100 m 100 m
1 (1 kHz) or lower
400 V — — 50 m 50 m 75 m 100 m 100 m
Shielded
200 V 10 m 25 m 50 m 75 m 100 m 100 m 100 m
2 (2 kHz) or higher
400 V — — 10 m 25 m 50 m 75 m 100 m

2. Installation and Wiring

2.5 Main circuit terminals
57
 Total wiring length (FR-E820-0175(3.7K) or higher, FR-E840-0095(3.7K) or higher), unshielded
cable

300 m

500 m or less 300 m

300 m + 300 m = 600 m

When driving a 400 V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor
terminals, deteriorating the insulation of the motor. In this case, take one of the following measure.
• Use a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor" and set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection according to the
wiring length.
Wiring length 50 m or Wiring length longer
Wiring length 50 to 100 m
shorter than 100 m
14.5 kHz or lower 8 kHz or lower 2 kHz or lower

 With PM motor
Use the wiring length of 100 m or shorter when connecting a PM motor. For the MM-GKR13 motor, the wiring length should be
30 m or shorter.
Use one PM motor for one inverter. Multiple PM motors cannot be connected to an inverter.
When the wiring length exceeds 50 m for a 400 V class motor (other than MM-GKR or EM-A) driven by an inverter under PM
sensorless vector control, set "9" (6 kHz) or less in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.

NOTE
• Especially for long-distance wiring, the inverter may be affected by a charging current caused by stray capacitances of the
wiring, leading to an activation of the overcurrent protection, malfunction of the fast-response current limit operation, or even
to an inverter failure. It may also cause a malfunction or fault of the equipment connected ON the inverter output side. If the
fast-response current limit function malfunctions, disable the function. (Refer to Pr.156 Stall prevention operation selection
in the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
• A surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) can be used under V/F control and Advanced magnetic flux vector
control.
• For the details of Pr.72 PWM frequency selection, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
• Refer to page 112 to drive a 400 V class motor by an inverter.
• The carrier frequency is limited during Real sensorless vector control and PM sensorless vector control. (Refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).)

2.5.4 Earthing (grounding) precautions

Always earth (ground) the motor and inverter.

 Purpose of earthing (grounding)

Generally, an electrical apparatus has an earth (ground) terminal, which must be connected to the ground before use.
An electrical circuit is usually insulated by an insulating material and encased. However, it is impossible to manufacture an
insulating material that can shut off a leakage current completely, and actually, a slight current flows into the case. The purpose
of earthing (grounding) the case of an electrical apparatus is to prevent operators from getting an electric shock from this
leakage current when touching it.
To avoid the influence of external noises, the earthing (grounding) is important to EMI-sensitive equipment that handle low-
level signals or operate very fast such as audio equipment, sensors, and computers.

58 2. Installation and Wiring

2.5 Main circuit terminals
 Earthing (grounding) system to be established
As described previously, the purpose of earthing (grounding) is roughly classified into the electrical shock prevention and the 1
prevention of malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic noise. These two purposes should be clearly distinguished,
and the appropriate earth (ground) system must be established to prevent the leakage current having the inverter's high
frequency components from reversing through another earth (ground) point for malfunction prevention by following these 2
instructions:
• Make the separate earth (ground) connection (I) for high frequency products such as the inverter from any other devices
(EMI-sensitive devices described above) wherever possible. 3
Establishing adequate common (single-point) earth (ground) system (II) shown in the following figure is allowed only in
cases where the separate earth (ground) system (I) is not feasible. Do not make inadequate common (single-point) earth
(ground) connection (III). 4
As leakage currents containing many high frequency components flows into the earthing (grounding) cables of the inverter
and peripheral devices (including a motor), the inverter must also be earthed (grounded) separately from EMI-sensitive
devices described above. 5
In a high building, it may be effective to use its iron structure frames as earthing (grounding) electrode for EMI prevention
in order to separate from the earth (ground) system for electric shock prevention.
- Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes 6
(NEC section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards). A neutral-point earthed (grounded) power supply
for 400 V class inverter in compliance with EN standard must be used.
- Use the thickest possible earthing (grounding) cable. The earthing (grounding) cable should be the size indicated in the
7
table on page 54.
- The earthing (grounding) point should be as close as possible to the inverter, and the earth (ground) wire length should
be as short as possible.
- Run the earthing (grounding) cable as far away as possible from the I/O wiring of the EMI-sensitive devices and run
8
them in parallel in the minimum distance.

Other Other
9
Other
Inverter equipment Inverter equipment Inverter equipment
(incl. inverter) (incl. inverter) (incl. inverter)
10

(I) Separate earthing (grounding): Good (III) Inadequate common (single-point) earthing (grounding): Bad
(II) Common (single-point) earthing (grounding): OK

NOTE
• To be compliant with the EU Directive (Low Voltage Directive), refer to the document enclosed with the product.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.5 Main circuit terminals
59
 2.6 Control circuit

2.6.1 Details on the control circuit terminals (Standard

model)
 Input signal
Termi
Refer
Ty nal
Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
pe symb
page
ol
Turn ON the STF signal to When the STF
STF*1 Forward rotation start start forward rotation and and STR signals
turn it OFF to stop. are turned ON
simultaneously, *2
Turn ON the STR signal to
the stop
STR*1 Reverse rotation start start reverse rotation and command is
turn it OFF to stop.
given.
RH Input resistance: 4.7
RM Multi-speed can be selected according to the kΩ, *2
SD Multi-speed selection
combination of RH, RM and RL signals. voltage when
Contact input

RL*1 (sink
contacts are open: 21
(negative common)) Turn ON the MRS signal (2 ms or more) to stop to 26 VDC,
PC the inverter output. Use this signal to shut off the current when
MRS*1 (source Output stop
inverter output when stopping the motor with an contacts are short-
*2

(positive common)) electromagnetic brake. circuited: 4 to 6

Use this signal to reset a fault output provided mADC
when a protective function is activated. Turn ON
the RES signal for 0.1 seconds or longer, then
turn it OFF.
RES*1 Reset
In the initial setting, reset is always enabled. By
*2

setting Pr.75, reset can be enabled only at an

inverter fault occurrence. The inverter recovers
about 1 second after the reset is released.
5 ±0.5 VDC,
Frequency setting Used as the power supply for an external *2
10 5 permissible load
power supply frequency setting (speed setting) potentiometer.
current: 10 mA
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 VDC) provides
the maximum output frequency at 5 V (or 10 V)
and makes input and output proportional.
Use Pr.73 to switch among input 0 to 5 VDC
Frequency setting *2
2 5 (initial setting), 0 to 10 VDC, and 0 to 20 mA.* For voltage input,
(voltage)
The initial setting varies depending on the
input resistance:
specification.
10±1 kΩ, maximum
Set the voltage/current input switch to the "I" permissible voltage:
Frequency setting

position to select current input (0 to 20 mA).

20 VDC.
Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 For current input,
VDC) provides the maximum output frequency input resistance: 245
at 20 mA and makes input and output ±5 Ω, maximum
proportional. This input signal is valid only when permissible current:
the AU signal is ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). 30 mA.
To use the terminal 4 (current input at initial Voltage/current
setting), assign "4" to any parameter from input switch
Frequency setting Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function *2
4 5 2
(current) selection) before turning ON the AU signal.
V I
* The initial setting varies depending on the
specification. 4
Use Pr.267 to switch among input 4 to 20 mA
(initial setting), 0 to 5 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. Set
the voltage/current input switch to the "V"
position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V / 0 to 10
V).
*1 The terminal function can be selected by Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).)
*2 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

60 2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
 Output signal
Termi
Refer
1
Ty nal Comm
Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
pe symb on
page
ol
1 changeover contact output that indicates that an 2
A, inverter's protective function has been activated and the Contact capacity: 240
Relay

B, Relay output (fault outputs are stopped. VAC 2 A *4

—
output) Fault: discontinuity across B and C (continuity across A (power factor = 0.4), 30
3
*1
C and C), Normal: continuity across B and C (discontinuity VDC 1 A
across A and C)
The output is in LOW state when the inverter output
frequency is equal to or higher than the starting Permissible load: 24
RUN*1 SE Inverter running *4
4
Open collector

frequency (initial value: 0.5 Hz). The output is in HIGH VDC (27 VDC at
state during stop or DC injection brake operation.*2 maximum), 0.1 A
The output is in LOW state when the inverter output (The voltage drop is 3.4 V
frequency is equal to or higher than the preset detection at maximum while the
FU*1 SE Frequency detection frequency, and is in HIGH state when it is less than the signal is ON.)
*4
5
preset detection frequency.*2
Permissible load current:
Pulse

FM*3 SD For meter 1 mA *4

Among several monitor items such as
output frequency, select one to output it Output item:
1440 pulses/s at 60 Hz 6
Output signal: 0 ±10
via these terminals. (The signal is not output
output during an inverter reset.) frequency VDC,
permissible load current:
7
Analog

The size of output signal is proportional (initial

AM*3 5 Analog voltage output
to the magnitude of the corresponding setting)
1 mA *4

monitor item. (load impedance 10 kΩ

or more), resolution: 12
bits

*1 The terminal function can be selected by Pr.190 to Pr.192 (Output terminal function selection). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
8
(Function).)
*2 The open collector transistor is ON (conductive) in LOW state. The transistor is OFF (not conductive) in HIGH state.
*3
*4
Terminal FM is available for the FM type inverter. Terminal AM is available for the AM type inverter.
Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
9
 Safety stop signal
Term
Refer 10
inal Comm
Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
symb on
page
ol
Use terminals S1 and S2 to receive the safety stop signal
Safety stop input input from the safety relay module. Terminals S1 and S2 can
S1 PC Input resistance: 4.7
(channel 1) be used at a time (dual channel). The Inverter judges the
kΩ,
condition of the internal safety circuit from the status
voltage when contacts
(shorted/opened) between terminals S1 and PC, or between
are open:
S2 and PC. When the status is opened, the inverter output is
21 to 26 VDC,
shut off.
Safety stop input current when contacts
S2 PC In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with
(channel 2) are short-circuited:
terminal PC by shorting wires. Remove the shorting wires
4 to 6 mADC
and connect the safety relay module when using the safety
stop function. 74
The output status varies depending on the input status of the
safety stop signals.
The output is in HIGH state during occurrence of the internal Permissible load: 24
safety circuit fault. The output is in LOW state otherwise. VDC (27 VDC at
Safety monitor output (The open collector transistor is ON (conductive) in LOW maximum), 0.1 A
SO SOC
(open collector output) state. The transistor is OFF (not conductive) in HIGH state.) (The voltage drop is
Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Functional Safety) 3.4 V at maximum
(BCN-A23488-000) when the signal is switched to HIGH while the signal is ON.)
while both terminals S1 and S2 are open. (Contact your sales
representative for this manual.)

2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
61
  Common terminal
Termi
Refer
nal
Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
symb
page
ol
Contact input
Common terminal for the contact input terminal (sink logic),
common (sink
terminal FM.
(negative common))
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal
External transistor
of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as
SD — common (source — —
a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid
(positive common))
malfunction by undesirable current.
Common terminal for the 24 VDC power supply (terminal
24 VDC power supply
PC).
common
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal
External transistor
of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as
common (sink
a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid
(negative common)) Power supply voltage
malfunction by undesirable current.
range:
— Safety stop input
PC Common terminal for safety stop input terminals 22 to 26.5 VDC, —
terminal common
permissible load current:
Contact input 100 mA
common (source Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
(positive common))
SD 24 VDC power supply Can be used as a 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
Frequency setting Common terminal for the frequency setting signal (terminal *1
5 — —
common 2 or 4). Do not earth (ground).
Open collector output
SE — Common terminal for terminals RUN and FU. — —
common
Safety monitor output
SOC — Common terminal for terminal SO. — 74
terminal common
*1 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

 Communication
Terminal Refer
Type Terminal name Terminal function description
symbol to page
RS-485 communication can be made through the PU connector
Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)
RS-485

— PU connector Transmission format: Multidrop link 85

Communication speed: 300 to 115200 bps
Wiring length: 500 m
Mini B connector (receptacle).
By connecting the inverter to a personal computer via this connector, FR
Configurator2 installed on the computer can be used for setting the inverter, or
USB

— USB B connector*1 monitoring or testing the inverter operation. 88

Interface: conforms to USB 1.1 (USB 2.0 full-speed compatible)
Transmission speed: 12 Mbps
Power supply: 5 V, 100 mA (500 mA maximum)

*1 USB bus power connection is available. The maximum SCCR is 500 mA. A PU connector cannot be used during USB bus power connection.

62 2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
2.6.2 Details on the control circuit terminals (Ethernet
model) 1
 Input signal
Termi
2
Ty nal Rated Refer
Common Terminal name Terminal function description
pe symbo specification to page
l
Turn ON the STF signal to Input resistance: 4.7
3
DI0*1 SD
Forward rotation start start forward rotation and turn When the STF kΩ,
it OFF to stop. and STR signals voltage when
Contact input

(sink
(negative common))
are turned ON
simultaneously,
contacts are open:
21 to 27 VDC, *2 4
PC Turn ON the STR signal to
the stop current when
DI1*1 (source Reverse rotation start start reverse rotation and turn command is
contacts are short-
(positive common)) it OFF to stop.
given. circuited: 4 to 6
mADC 5
When connecting the frequency setting 5 VDC ±0.5 V,
Frequency setting *2
10 5 potentiometer at an initial status, connect it to permissible load
power supply
terminal 10. current: 10 mA
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 VDC) provides 6
the maximum output frequency at 5 V (or 10 V)
and makes input and output proportional. Use
Pr.73 to switch among input 0 to 5 VDC (initial
2 5
Frequency setting
(voltage)
setting), 0 to 10 VDC, and 0 to 20 mA. For voltage input, *2 7
* The initial setting varies depending on the input resistance:
specification. 10±1 kΩ, maximum
Set the voltage/current input switch to the "I" permissible voltage:
Frequency setting

position to select current input (0 to 20 mA). 20 VDC. 8

Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 For current input,
VDC) provides the maximum output frequency input resistance:
at 20 mA and makes input and output 245 ±5 Ω, maximum
proportional. This input signal is valid only when permissible current: 9
the AU signal is ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). 30 mA.
To use the terminal 4 (current input at initial Voltage/current
input switch
setting), assign "4" to Pr.178 or Pr.179 (Input
Frequency setting
4 5
(current)
terminal function selection) before turning ON
the AU signal. V I
2 *2
10
* The initial setting varies depending on the 4
specification. Use Pr.267 to switch among input
4 to 20 mA (initial setting), 0 to 5 VDC, and 0 to
10 VDC. Set the voltage/current input switch to
the "V" position to select voltage input (0 to 5 V /
0 to 10 V).
*1 The terminal function can be selected by Pr.178 or Pr.179 (Input terminal function selection). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).)
*2 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

 Output signal
Termin
Ty Comm Refer
al Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification
pe on to page
symbol
1 changeover contact output that indicates that an
A, inverter's protective function has been activated and the Contact capacity: 240
Relay

B, Relay output (fault outputs are stopped. VAC 2 A *2

—
output) Fault: discontinuity across B and C (continuity across A (power factor = 0.4),
C*1 and C), Normal: continuity across B and C (discontinuity 30 VDC 1 A
across A and C)
*1 The terminal function can be selected by Pr.192 (Output terminal function selection). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
*2 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
63
  Safety stop signal
Term
Refer
inal Comm
Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
symb on
page
ol
Use terminals S1 and S2 to receive the safety stop signal
Safety stop input input from the safety relay module. Terminals S1 and S2 can
S1 PC Input resistance: 4.7
(channel 1) be used at a time (dual channel). The Inverter judges the
kΩ,
condition of the internal safety circuit from the status
voltage when contacts
(shorted/opened) between terminals S1 and PC, or between
are open:
S2 and PC. When the status is opened, the inverter output is
21 to 26 VDC,
shut off.
Safety stop input current when contacts
S2 PC In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with
(channel 2) are short-circuited:
terminal PC by shorting wires. Remove the shorting wires
4 to 6 mADC
and connect the safety relay module when using the safety
stop function. 74
The output status varies depending on the input status of the
safety stop signals.
The output is in HIGH state during occurrence of the internal Permissible load: 24
safety circuit fault. The output is in LOW state otherwise. VDC (27 VDC at
Safety monitor output (The open collector transistor is ON (conductive) in LOW maximum), 0.1 A
SO SOC
(open collector output) state. The transistor is OFF (not conductive) in HIGH state.) (The voltage drop is
Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Functional Safety) 3.4 V at maximum
(BCN-A23488-000) when the signal is switched to HIGH while the signal is ON.)
while both terminals S1 and S2 are open. (Contact your sales
representative for this manual.)

 Common terminal
Termi
Refer
nal
Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
symb
page
ol
Contact input
common (sink Common terminal for the contact input terminal (sink logic).
(negative common))
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal
External transistor
SD — of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as — —
common (source
a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid
(positive common))
malfunction by undesirable current.
24 VDC power supply Common terminal for the 24 VDC power supply (terminal
common PC). Isolated from terminal 5.
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal
External transistor
of a transistor output (open collector output) device, such as
common (sink
a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid
(negative common)) Power supply voltage
malfunction by undesirable current.
range:
— Safety stop input
PC Common terminal for safety stop input terminals 22 to 26.5 VDC, —
terminal common
permissible load current:
Contact input 100 mA
common (source Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).
(positive common))
SD 24 VDC power supply Can be used as a 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
Frequency setting Common terminal for the frequency setting signal (terminal *1
5 — —
common 2 or 4). Do not earth (ground).
Safety monitor output
SOC — Common terminal for terminal SO. — —
terminal common
*1 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

64 2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
 Communication
Type
Terminal
Terminal name Terminal function description
Refer 1
symbol to page
Communication can be made via Ethernet.
Category: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Transmission method: Baseband 2
Data transmission speed: 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) / 10 Mbps (10BASE-T)
Ethernet

Ethernet connector (2 Maximum segment length: 100 m between the hub and the inverter *3
—
ports)*1 Interface: RJ-45
Number of cascade connection stages: Up to 2 (100BASE-TX) / up to 4 3
(10BASE-T)
Number of interfaces available: 2
IP version: IPv4
Mini B connector (receptacle). 4
By connecting the inverter to a personal computer via this connector, FR
Configurator2 installed on the computer can be used for setting the inverter, or
USB

— USB B connector*2 monitoring or testing the inverter operation. *3

Interface: conforms to USB 1.1 (USB 2.0 full-speed compatible)
Transmission speed: 12 Mbps
5
Power supply: 5 V, 100 mA (500 mA maximum)

*1 Do not connect the parameter unit. The inverter may be damaged.

*2 USB bus power connection is available. The maximum SCCR is 500 mA. 6
*3 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

2.6.3 Details on the control circuit terminals (Safety 7

communication model)
 Input signal 8
Termin
Ty Comm Refer
al Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification
pe on to page
symbol
9
5 ±0.5 VDC,
Frequency setting Used as the power supply for an external frequency *1
10 5 permissible load
power supply setting (speed setting) potentiometer.
current: 10 mA
Inputting 0 to 5 VDC (or 0 to 10 VDC) provides the
maximum output frequency at 5 V (or 10 V) and makes
10
input and output proportional. Use Pr.73 to switch
For voltage input,
Frequency setting among input 0 to 5 VDC (initial setting), 0 to 10 VDC, and *1
2 5 input resistance: 10±1
(voltage) 0 to 20 mA.
kΩ, maximum
* The initial setting varies depending on the specification.
permissible voltage: 20
Frequency setting

Set the voltage/current input switch to the "I" position to

VDC.
select current input (0 to 20 mA).
For current input,
Inputting 4 to 20 mADC (or 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC) input resistance: 245
provides the maximum output frequency at 20 mA and ±5 Ω, maximum
makes input and output proportional. This input signal is permissible current: 30
valid only when the AU signal is ON (terminal 2 input is mA.
invalid). Voltage/current
To use terminal 4 (current input at initial setting), assign input switch
Frequency setting *1
4 5 "4" to Pr.178 or Pr.189 (Input terminal function selection)
(current) 2
before turning ON the AU signal.
V I
* The initial setting varies depending on the specification.
Use Pr.267 to switch among input 4 to 20 mA (initial 4
setting), 0 to 5 VDC, and 0 to 10 VDC. Set the voltage/
current input switch to the "V" position to select voltage
input (0 to 5 V / 0 to 10 V).
*1 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
65
  Output signal
Termin
Ty Comm Refer
al Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification
pe on to page
symbol
1 changeover contact output that indicates that an
A, inverter's protective function has been activated and Contact capacity: 240
Relay

B, Relay output (fault the outputs are stopped. VAC 2 A *2

—
output) Fault: discontinuity across B and C (continuity across (power factor = 0.4), 30
C*1 A and C), Normal: continuity across B and C VDC 1 A
(discontinuity across A and C)
*1 The terminal function can be selected by Pr.192 (Output terminal function selection). (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
*2 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

 Safety input/output signal

Termin
Comm Refer
Type al Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification
on to page
symbol
Safety input (channel Input resistance: 4.7 kΩ, *1
SX1 PC
1) voltage when contacts
Contact input

are open:
Terminal functions can be selected using Pr.S051
21 to 26 VDC,
Safety input (channel SX1/SX2 terminal function selection.
SX2 PC current when contacts are *1
2) short-circuited:
4 to 6 mADC
Safety output
Open collector output

SY1 SC1 *1
(channel 1)
Permissible load: 24 VDC
(27 VDC at maximum),
Terminal functions can be selected using Pr.S055
0.1 A (The voltage drop is
Safety output SY1/SY2 terminal function selection.
SY2 SC2 3.4 V at maximum while *1
(channel 2) the signal is ON.)

*1 Refer to the FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual (Functional Safety).

 Common terminal
Termi
Refer
nal
Common Terminal name Terminal function description Rated specification to
symb
page
ol
24 VDC power supply
common Common output terminal for 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply
SD — — 74
External transistor (terminal PC). Isolated from terminal 5.
common (source)
Safety input terminal Power supply voltage *2
—
common range:
Common terminal for terminals SX1 and SX2.*1 Can be
PC *1
22 to 26.5 VDC,
SD 24 VDC power supply used as a 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply. permissible load current: *2
100 mA
Frequency setting Common terminal for the frequency setting signal (terminal *1
5 — —
common 2 or 4). Do not earth (ground).
Safety output *2
SC1 — Common terminal for terminal SY1
common (channel 1)
—
Safety output *2
SC2 — Common terminal for terminal SY2
common (channel 2)
*1 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
*2 Refer to the FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual (Functional Safety).

66 2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
 Communication
Type
Terminal
Terminal name Terminal function description
Refer 1
symbol to page
Communication can be made via Ethernet.
Category: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Transmission method: Baseband 2
Data transmission speed: 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) / 10 Mbps (10BASE-T)
Ethernet

Ethernet connector (2 Maximum segment length: 100 m between the hub and the inverter *3
—
ports)*1 Interface: RJ-45
Number of cascade connection stages: Up to 2 (100BASE-TX) / up to 4 3
(10BASE-T)
Number of interfaces available: 2
IP version: IPv4
Mini B connector (receptacle). 4
By connecting the inverter to a personal computer via this connector, FR
Configurator2 installed on the computer can be used for setting the inverter, or
USB

— USB B connector*2 monitoring or testing the inverter operation. *3

Interface: conforms to USB 1.1 (USB 2.0 full-speed compatible)
Transmission speed: 12 Mbps
5
Power supply: 5 V, 100 mA (500 mA maximum)

*1 Do not connect the parameter unit. The inverter may be damaged.

*2 USB bus power connection is available. The maximum SCCR is 500 mA. 6
*3 Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).

2.6.4 Control logic (sink/source) change (Standard 7

model / Ethernet model)
The control logic of input signals can be switched as necessary for the standard model and the Ethernet model.
8
To change the control logic, change the DIP switch position on the control circuit board.
The initial setting of the control logic differs depending on the specification.
(The output signals may be used in either the sink or source logic independently of the switch setting.)
9
■Standard model ■Ethernet model

10

For sink logic

For sink logic
SINK SINK SOURCE

SOURCE

NOTE
• Never change the control logic while power is ON.

 Sink logic and source logic

• In the sink logic, a signal turns ON when a current exits from the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal SD is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
67
 • In the source logic, a signal turns ON when a current enters into the corresponding signal input terminal.
Terminal PC is common to the contact input signals. Terminal SE is common to the open collector output signals.
Current flow concerning the input/output signal Current flow concerning the input/output signal
when sink logic is selected when source logic is selected

Sink logic Source logic

PC

Current STF/ Sink

DI0 Current STF/
connector
R DI0
R Source
connector
STR/
DI1 STR/
R DI1
R

SD

Inverter DC input (sink type) Inverter DC input (source type)

<Example: QX40> <Example: QX80>

RUN TB1 RUN TB1

R R
R R

SE - + TB17 SE + - TB18

24 VDC 24 VDC

Current flow Current flow

• When using an external power supply for transistor output

Sink logic Source logic

Use terminal PC as a common terminal, and perform wiring as Use terminal SD as a common terminal, and perform wiring as
follows. (Do not connect terminal SD on the inverter with the follows. (Do not connect terminal PC on the inverter with the
terminal of 0 V for the external power supply. When using terminal of +24 V for the external power supply. When using
terminals PC-SD as a 24 VDC power supply, do not install an terminals PC-SD as a 24 VDC power supply, do not install an
external power supply in parallel with the inverter. Doing so external power supply in parallel with the inverter. Doing so
may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable may cause a malfunction in the inverter due to undesirable
currents.) currents.)

QY40P type transistor Inverter

QY80 type transistor Inverter
output unit STF/
TB1 DI0 output unit
24 VDC PC
(SD)
STR/
TB2 DI1 TB1 STF/DI0 24 VDC
(SD)
TB2 STR/DI1
Constant TB17
voltage PC Constant
24 VDC

circuit voltage
TB18 circuit
Fuse TB17

24 VDC SD TB18 SD

Current flow
Current flow

68 2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
2.6.5 Wiring of control circuit
1
 Control circuit terminal layout
 Standard model (FM type inverter)
• Recommended cable gauge: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 2

S1 S2 PC RUN FU SE
3

MRS RES SD STF STR

4
RL RM RH SD

SO SOC FM SD
5

10 2 5 4 6
A B C
7
 Standard model (AM type inverter)
• Recommended cable gauge: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 8
S1 S2 PC RUN FU SE
9

10
MRS RES SD STF STR

RL RM RH SD

SO SOC AM 5

10 2 5 4

A B C

2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
69
  Ethernet model
• Recommended cable gauge: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2

S1 S2 PC DI0 DI1 SD

SO SOC

10 2 5 4

A B C

 Safety communication model

• Recommended cable gauge: 0.3 to 0.75 mm2

SX1 SX2 PC SD SY1 SC1

10 2 5 4 SY2 SC2

A B C

 Wiring method
 Power supply connection
Use crimp terminals and stripped wire for the control circuit wiring. For single wire, the stripped wire can be used without crimp
terminal.
Connect the end of wires (crimp terminal or stranded wire) to the terminal block.

1. Strip the signal wires as shown below. If too much of the wire is stripped, a short circuit may occur with neighboring
wires. If not enough of the wire is stripped, wires may become loose and fall out.
Twist the stripped end of wires to prevent them from fraying. Do not solder it.
Cable sheath stripping length

70 2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
 2. Crimp the terminals on the wire.
Insert wires to the crimp terminal, and check that the wires come out for about 0 to 0.5 mm from a sleeve.
Check the condition of the crimp terminals after crimping. Do not use the crimp terminals of which the crimping is
1
inappropriate, or the face is damaged.
Unstranded
wires 2
ire
W
ve
ee
Sl

o0
.5m
m
Damaged Crumpled tip
Wires are not inserted
into the sleeve
3
0t

Crimp terminals commercially available (as of October 2020)

• Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.
4
Ferrule part No.
Wire gauge Crimping tool
Without insulation
(mm2) With insulation sleeve
sleeve
model No. 5
0.3 AI 0,34-10TQ —
0.5 AI 0,5-10WH —
0.75 AI 0,75-10GY A 0,75-10
CRIMPFOX 6
6
1 AI 1-10RD A 1-10
1.25, 1.5 AI 1, 5-10BK A 1, 5-10
0.75 (two-wire
product)
AI-TWIN 2×0,75-10GY —
7
• NICHIFU Co., Ltd.
Wire gauge
(mm2)
Blade terminal part
No.
Insulation cap part No.
Crimping tool model
No.
8
0.3 to 0.75 BT 0.75-11 VC 0.75 NH 69

3. Insert the wire into the terminal block. When using single wire or stranded wire without crimp terminal, 9
push an open/close button all the way down with a flathead
screw driver, and insert the wire.
Open/close button 10

Flathead screwdriver

NOTE
• When using stranded wires without a blade terminal, twist enough to avoid short circuit with a nearby terminals or wires.
• Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause an inverter damage
or injury.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
71
  Wire removal
Pull the wire while pushing the open/close button all the way down firmly with a flathead screwdriver.

Open/close button

Flathead screwdriver

NOTE
• Pulling out the wire forcefully without pushing the open/close button all the way down may damage the terminal block.
• Use a small flathead screwdriver (tip thickness: 0.4 mm / tip width: 2.5 mm).
If a flathead screwdriver with a narrow tip is used, terminal block may be damaged.
Commercially available products (as of October 2020)

Product
Model Manufacturer
name
Driver SZF 0- 0,4 × 2,5 Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

• Place the flathead screwdriver vertical to the open/close button. In case the blade tip slips, it may cause an inverter damage
or injury.

 Using terminal PC as the external transistor common terminal (standard model / Ethernet
model)
Remove jumpers connecting terminals PC and S1 and terminals PC and S2, and wire terminals as follows.

S1 S2 PC S1 S2 PC
S1 S2 PC

To external transistor common

NOTE
• Note that two wires are connected to terminal PC and terminal S1.

 Common terminals of the control circuit (SD, PC, 5, SE)

• Terminals SD (sink logic), PC (source logic), 5, and SE are common terminals (0 V) for I/O signals. (All common terminals
are isolated from each other.) Do not earth (ground) these terminals. Avoid connecting terminal SD (sink logic) with
terminal 5, terminal PC (source logic) with terminal 5, and terminal SE with terminal 5.
• In the sink logic, terminal SD is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF (DI0), STR (DI1), RH, RM, RL,
MRS, and RES) and the pulse train output terminal (FM*1). The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control
circuit by photocoupler.
• In the source logic, terminal PC is a common terminal for the contact input terminals (STF (DI0), STR (DI1), RH, RM, RL,
MRS, and RES). The open collector circuit is isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.

72 2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
 • Terminal 5 is a common terminal for the frequency setting terminal (2 or 4) and the analog output terminals (AM*2). It should
be protected from external noise using a shielded or twisted cable. 1
• Terminal SE is a common terminal for the open collector output terminals (RUN and FU). The contact input circuit is
isolated from the internal control circuit by photocoupler.
*1
*2
Terminal FM is provided in the FM-type standard model inverter.
Terminal AM is provided in the AM-type standard model inverter.
2
 Signal inputs by contactless switches
The contact input terminals of the inverter (STF (DI0), STR (DI1), RH, RM, RL, MRS, and RES) can be controlled using a 3
transistor instead of a contact switch. Refer to page 68 for the connection diagram.

2.6.6 Wiring precautions 4

• It is recommended to use a cable of 0.3 to 0.75 mm2 for the connection to the control circuit terminals.
• The wiring length should be 30 m (200 m for terminal FM) at the maximum.
• Do not short across terminals PC and SD. Doing so may cause an inverter failure.
5
• Use two or more parallel micro-signal contacts or twin contacts to prevent contact faults when using contact inputs since
the control circuit input signals are micro-currents.
6

7
Micro signal contacts Twin contacts

• To suppress EMI, use shielded or twisted cables for the control circuit terminals and run them away from the main and 8
power circuits (including the 200 V relay sequence circuit). For the cables connected to the control circuit terminals,
connect their shields to the common terminal of the connected control circuit terminal. When connecting an external power
supply to terminal PC, however, connect the shield of the power supply cable to the negative side of the external power 9
supply. Do not directly earth (ground) the shield to the enclosure, etc.
• Always apply a voltage to the fault output terminals (A, B, and C) via a relay coil, lamp, etc.
• When a relay coil is connected to the output terminals, use one with a surge absorbing function (reflux diode). When the 10
voltage application direction is incorrect, the inverter will be damaged. Pay attention to the diode direction or other
precautions to avoid incorrect wiring.

RUN
RA
24VDC power supply
or
12V power supply
SE

Inverter

2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
73
 2.6.7 Safety stop function (Standard model / Ethernet
model)
 Function description
The terminals related to the safety stop function are as follows.
Terminal
Terminal function description
symbol
S1*1 Input terminal as the safety stop channel 1. Status of both the circuit between terminals S1 and PC and the
circuit between terminals S2 and PC
S2*1 Input terminal as the safety stop channel 2. Open: Safety stop is activated.
Shorted: Safety stop is not activated
PC*1 Common terminal for S1 and S2.
Output terminal used for fault detection and fault indication
display. OFF: Internal safety circuit fault*2
SO The terminal is ON (conducted) while no internal safety circuit ON: No internal safety circuit fault*2
failure*2 exists.
SOC Open collector output (terminal SO) common
*1 In the initial status, terminals S1 and PC and terminals S2 and PC are respectively shorted with shorting wires.) To use the safety stop function,
remove all the shorting wires, and then connect to the safety relay module as shown in the connection diagram.
*2 When any fault listed on the next page occurs in the internal safety circuit, the corresponding indication is shown on the operation panel.

NOTE
• Terminal SO can be used to display a fault indication and to prevent restarting of the inverter. The signal output from terminal
SO cannot be used to input a safety stop signal to other devices.

 Connection diagram
To prevent restart at fault occurrence, connect terminals SO and SOC to the reset button, which are the feedback input
terminals of the safety relay module.

MC ∗1

FR-E800(-E)
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

SO
Logic
SOC

IGBTs
Gate
Driver
+24V
PC Fuse
CPU
CPU
RESET Gate
Driver
S1

S2
Emergency
stop button

Safety relay module/

Safety programmable controller
U V W

*1 To avoid an electric shock hazard, install a magnetic contactor (MC) at the input side of the inverter.

74 2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
 Safety stop function operation
Internal
Input terminal*1*2
Output
Output signal*8*9*10 Inverter
Operation panel 1
Input safety terminal indication
operating
power circuit
S1 S2 SO SAFE SAFE2 status E.SAF*6 SA*7
status

OFF — — — OFF OFF OFF

Output shutoff Not Not 2
(Safe state) displayed displayed
Operation Not Not
Normal ON ON ON*3 OFF ON*3 enabled displayed displayed
Output shutoff 3
Normal ON OFF OFF*4 OFF*4 OFF*4 (Safe state)
Displayed Displayed

Output shutoff
Normal OFF ON OFF*4 OFF*4 OFF*4 (Safe state)
Displayed Displayed

Output shutoff Not

4
Normal OFF OFF ON*3 ON*3 ON*3 (Safe state) displayed
Displayed
ON
Output shutoff Not
Fault ON ON OFF OFF OFF Displayed
(Safe state) displayed*5 5
Output shutoff
Fault ON OFF OFF OFF OFF Displayed Displayed
(Safe state)
Output shutoff
Fault OFF ON OFF OFF OFF Displayed Displayed
(Safe state) 6
Output shutoff
Fault OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Displayed Displayed
(Safe state)
*1 The terminal ON state shows that the terminal is conducted (the line is closed), and the OFF state shows that the terminal is not conducted (the
line is open). 7
*2 When not using the safety stop function, short across terminals S1 and PC and terminals S2 and PC to use the inverter. (In the initial status,
terminals S1 and PC and terminals S2 and PC are respectively shorted with shorting wires.)
*3 If any of the faults shown in the following table occurs, terminal SO, the SAFE signal, and the SAFE2 signal are turned OFF.

Operation panel Operation panel

8
Fault type Fault type
indication indication
Option fault E.OPT Speed deviation excess detection E.OSD
Communication option fault E.OP1 Signal loss detection E.ECT 9
Internal storage device fault E.PE6 Excessive position fault E.OD
Parameter storage device fault (control
E.PE Brake sequence fault E.MB1 to E.MB7
circuit board)
Retry count excess E.RET Acceleration error E.OA 10
Parameter storage device fault (main
E.PE2 E.CPU
circuit board) CPU fault
Safety circuit fault E.SAF E.5 to E.7
Overspeed occurrence E.OS Internal circuit fault E.13

*4 When the internal safety circuit is operated normally (no fault occurs), terminal SO, the SAFE signal, and the SAFE2 signal remain ON until
"E.SAF" is displayed. Terminal SO, the SAFE signal, and the SAFE2 signal are turned OFF when "E.SAF" is displayed.
*5 "SA" is displayed when terminals S1 and S2 are identified as OFF due to the internal safety circuit failure.
*6 If another fault occurs when the fault E.SAF occurs, the other fault indication may be displayed.
*7 If another warning occurs when the warning SA occurs, the other warning indication may be displayed.
*8 The ON/OFF state of the output signal is the one for the positive logic. In negative logic, the signal status is opposite.
*9 To assign the functions of the SAFE signal and SAFE2 signal to output terminals, set values shown in the following table in any two parameters
from Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection).

Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting

Output signal
Positive logic Negative logic
SAFE 80 180
SAFE2 81 181

*10 The use of the SAFE signal and SAFE2 signal has not been certified for compliance with safety standards.

For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Functional Safety).

2.6.8 Safety communication function (Safety

communication model)
This function is not available for the standard model and the Ethernet model.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
75
  Outline
Mitsubishi Electric FR-E800-SCE general-purpose inverters have safety functions to stop the output to motors.
By connecting the inverter with a safety programmable controller with an Ethernet cable, signal input via communication is
enabled.

 Wiring
The following describes terminals related to safety sub-functions.
Terminal
Terminal function description
symbol
SX1
Terminal functions can be selected using Pr.S051 SX1/SX2 terminal function selection.
SX2
SY1
Terminal functions can be selected using Pr.S055 SY1/SY2 terminal function selection.
SY2
Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector
output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by
SD
undesirable current.
Common terminal for the 24 VDC power supply (terminal PC). Isolated from terminal 5.
Common terminal for SX1 and SX2.
PC
Can be used as a 24 VDC 0.1 A power supply.
SC1
Common terminal for SY1 and SY2.
SC2

 Connection diagram

MC *1

FR-E800-SCE
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

Ethernet Ethernet
connector connector

IGBTs
Gate
CPU
Driver

Emergency
stop button CPU
+24V Gate
Safety programmable PC Fuse Driver
CPU
controller

SY1 SC1 SX1 SY2 SC2 SX2 U V W

Power supply Brake M

RA2 RA1

*1 To avoid an electric shock hazard, install a magnetic contactor (MC) at the input side of the inverter.

 Operation of the SA warning and the SAFE and SAFE2 signals

STO function status when Output signal*5*6*7
E.SAF Status of safety SA
the STO or SS1 command Inverter operating status
indication*3 related parts indication*4 SAFE SAFE2
is input
STO disabled Operation enabled Not displayed OFF ON*1
Not displayed Normal
STO disabled*2 Output shutoff (Safe state) Displayed ON*1 ON*1

76 2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
 STO function status when Output signal*5*6*7
E.SAF Status of safety SA
the STO or SS1 command Inverter operating status
indication*3 related parts
is input
indication*4 SAFE SAFE2 1
Displayed Fault — Output shutoff (Safe state) Not displayed OFF OFF
*1 If any of the faults shown in the following table occurs, the SAFE signal and the SAFE2 signal are turned OFF.

Fault type
Operation panel
Fault type
Operation panel 2
indication indication
Option fault E.OPT Speed deviation excess detection E.OSD
Communication option fault
Internal storage device fault
E.OP1
E.PE6
Signal loss detection
Excessive position fault
E.ECT
E.OD
3
Parameter storage device fault (control
E.PE Brake sequence fault E.MB1 to E.MB7
circuit board)
Retry count excess E.RET Acceleration error E.OA 4
Parameter storage device fault (main E.CPU
E.PE2
circuit board) CPU fault
Safety circuit fault E.SAF E.5 to E.7
Overspeed occurrence E.OS Internal circuit fault E.13 5
*2 When safety communication functions are enabled (Pr.S002 ≠ "0"), the STO function is enabled while the safety communication is not
established.
*3
*4
If another fault occurs when the fault E.SAF occurs, the other fault indication may be displayed.
If another warning occurs when the warning SA occurs, the other warning indication may be displayed.
6
*5 The ON/OFF state of the output signal is the one for the positive logic. In negative logic, the signal status is opposite.
*6 To assign the functions of the SAFE signal and SAFE2 signal to output terminals, set either value shown in the following table in Pr.192 ABC
terminal function selection. To output the signal via communication, the function can be assigned also to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal
function selection) using communication protocols. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual (Communication) or the Instruction Manual of 7
each communication option.

Pr.190 to Pr.196 setting

Output signal
Positive logic Negative logic 8
SAFE 80 180
SAFE2 81 181

*7 The use of the SAFE signal and SAFE2 signal has not been certified for compliance with safety standards. 9
For details, refer to the FR-E800-SCE Instruction Manual (Functional Safety).

10

2. Installation and Wiring

2.6 Control circuit
77
 2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector
control)
Using encoder-equipped motors together with a Vector control compatible option (FR-A8AP E kit) enables speed, torque, and
position control operations under orientation control, encoder feedback control, and full-scale Vector control.
This section shows connection examples using the FR-A8AP E kit.

 Appearance and parts name of the FR-A8AP

Front view (a) Rear view
Terminal layout (a) (a)
(h)
(d)

(f) 1
2
O
N

SW2
PB1
PZ1
PA1

PIN
PG
PG

PIN and PO
(c) SW3
are not used.
O
N

(e)
1
2
3
4
SW1
PB2
PZ2
PA2

PO
SD
SD

(a) (a)

(b) (a)

Symbol Name Description Refer to page

(a) Mounting hole Used for installation to the inverter. —
(b) Terminal block Connected with the encoder. 82
Encoder type selection switch
(c) Switches the encoder type (differential line driver/complementary). 79
(SW3)
(d) CON2 connector Not used. —
Terminating resistor selection
(e) Switch ON or OFF the internal terminating resistor. 79
switches (SW1)
Switches (SW2) for manufacturer Do not change the initial setting (both SW2-1 and SW2-2 switches: OFF
(f) —
setting 1
2 ).
O
N

(g) Connector Connected to the option connector of the inverter. 15

(h) LED for manufacturer check Not used. —

 Terminals of the FR-A8AP

Terminal
Terminal name Description
symbol
PA1 Encoder A-phase signal input terminal
PA2 Encoder A-phase inverse signal input terminal
PB1 Encoder B-phase signal input terminal
A-, B- and Z-phase signals are input from the encoder.
PB2 Encoder B-phase inverse signal input terminal
PZ1 Encoder Z-phase signal input terminal
PZ2 Encoder Z-phase inverse signal input terminal
PG Encoder power supply (positive) input terminal Input terminal for the encoder power supply.
Connect the external power supply and the encoder power cable. When the
encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input. Make
SD Encoder power supply ground terminal
the voltage of the external power supply the same as the encoder output
voltage. (Check the encoder specification.)
PIN
Not used.
PO

NOTE
• When the encoder's output voltage differs from its input power supply voltage, the signal loss detection (E.ECT) may occur.
• Incorrect wiring or faulty setting to the encoder will cause a fault such as an overcurrent (E.OC[ ]) and an inverter overload
(E.THT). Correctly perform the encoder wiring and setting.

78 2. Installation and Wiring

2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
 Switches on the FR-A8AP
• Use the encoder type selection switch (SW3) to select the differential line driver or the complementary. 1
It is initially set to the differential line driver. Switch its position according to the output circuit.
Differential line
driver (initial status)
2
1 O
2 N

SW2

3
SW3

O
N
1
2
3
4
Complementary

SW1
4
• Use the terminating resistor selection switches (SW1) to select ON/OFF of the internal terminating resistor.
Set the switches ON (initial status) when an encoder output type is differential line driver, and set OFF when
complementary. 5
ON: With internal terminating resistor (initial status)
OFF: Without internal terminating resistor
Internal terminating 6
resistor-ON
(initial status)

7
1 O
2 N

SW2

SW3
O
N
1
2
3
4
SW1

Internal terminating
resistor-OFF
8

9
NOTE
• Set all switches to the same setting (ON/OFF).
• Set the switches OFF when sharing an encoder with another unit (CNC (computerized numerical controller), etc.) having a
terminating resistor under the differential line driver setting.
10

• Motor and switch setting

Encoder type selection Terminating resistor Power supply
Motor
switch (SW3) selection switches (SW1) specification*2
Mitsubishi Electric high-
performance energy-saving motor SF-PR-SC Complementary OFF 12 to 24 V
with encoder
Mitsubishi Electric Vector control
SF-V5RU Complementary OFF 12 V
dedicated motor
Mitsubishi Electric inverter-driven
GM-DZ
geared motor for encoder feedback Differential ON 5V
GM-DP
control
Mitsubishi Electric standard motor SF-JR Differential ON 5V
with encoder SF-HR Differential ON 5V
Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency
Others *1 *1 *1*3
motor with encoder
SF-JRCA Differential ON 5V
Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque SF-HRCA Differential ON 5V
motor with encoder
Others *1 *1 *1*3

Other manufacturer's motor with encoder *1 *1 *1*3

*1 Set according to the motor (encoder).

*2 Prepare the power supply (5 V/12 V/15 V/24 V) for the encoder according to the encoder's output voltage.
*3 When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
79
 NOTE
• The SW2 switches are for manufacturer setting. Do not change the setting.
• When the power supply of the inverter is turned OFF, also turn off the power supply of the encoder. Otherwise, the plug-in
option may be damaged.

• Encoder specifications
Encoder for GM-DZ, GM-DP, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-
Item Encoder for SF-PR-SC and SF-V5RU
JRCA, and SF-HRCA
Resolution 2048 pulses/rev 1024 pulses/rev
Power supply voltage 12 VDC ±10%, 24 VDC ±10% 5 VDC ±10%
Current consumption 150 mA 150 mA
Phase A and Phase B: 90 degrees out of phase, Phase A and Phase B: 90 degrees out of phase,
Output signal form
Phase Z: 1 pulse/rev Phase Z: 1 pulse/rev
Output circuit Complementary Differential line driver AM26LS31 equivalent
H level: (Power supply for encoder - 3 V) or more, H level: 2.4 V or more,
Output voltage
L level: 3 V or less L level: 0.5 V or less

 Encoder cable
 SF-PR-SC/SF-V5RU with encoder
FR-E800
(FR-A8AP) PLG
PA1 A
PA2 B
PB1 C
PB2 D
PZ1 F
F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2 mm2 D/MS3057-12A PZ2 G Positioning keyway
Approx. 140 mm
11 mm

Earth cable
PG M A B
S N C
L
SD R T P D
60 mm K E
S R
L D/MS3106B20-29S J F
H G
A P-clip for earthing (grounding) a shielded cable is provided. D/MS3106B20-29S
(As viewed from wiring side
2 mm2
PG

SD

Model Length L (m)

FR-V7CBL5 5
FR-V7CBL15 15
FR-V7CBL30 30

80 2. Installation and Wiring

2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
 GM-DZ/GM-DP/SF-JR/SF-HR/SF-JRCA/SF-HRCA with encoder

F-DPEVSB 12P 0.2 mm2 D/MS3057-12A

FR-E800 1
(FR-A8AP) PLG
Approx. 140 mm

11 mm
Earth cable PA1 C
PA2 R
PB1
PB2
A
N 2
60 mm PZ1 B
L PZ2 P Positioning keyway
D/MS3106B20-29S

PG
M A B
N C
3
H L
K T P D
SD
K E
S R
4
J
H G F

D/MS3106B20-29S
(As viewed from wiring side)
2 mm2
PG 5
SD

FR-JCBL5
Model
5
Length L (m)
6
FR-JCBL15 15
FR-JCBL30 30

• When using an encoder cable (FR-JCBL, FR-V5CBL, etc.) dedicated to the conventional motor, the cables need to be
7
treated as the terminal block of the FR-A8AP is an insertion type. Cut the crimp terminal of the encoder cable and strip its
sheath to make its cable wires loose. Also, treat the shielding wires of the shielded twisted pair cable to ensure that they
do not contact conductive areas.
8
Twist the stripped end of wires to prevent them from fraying. Do not solder them.
Cable stripping size
9

5 mm
10
NOTE
• Information on crimp terminals
Commercially available products (as of October 2020)
Phoenix Contact Co., Ltd.

Ferrule terminal model

Terminal screw Wire gauge Crimping tool
size (mm2) With insulation Without insulation model No.
sleeve sleeve
0.3 AI 0,34-6TQ A 0,34-7
M2 CRIMPFOX 6
0.5 AI 0,5-6WH A 0,5-6

NICHIFU Co., Ltd.

Terminal screw Wire gauge Blade terminal Insulation cap Crimping tool
size (mm2) part No. part No. model No.
M2 0.3 to 0.75 BT 0.75-7 VC 0.75 NH 69

• When using a blade terminal (without insulation sleeve), take caution that the twisted wires do not come out.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
81
 • Connection terminal compatibility table
GM-DZ, GM-DP, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA,
Motor SF-PR-SC, SF-V5RU
SF-HRCA (with encoder)
Encoder cable FR-V7CBL FR-JCBL
PA1 PA PA
PA2 Do not connect anything to this. PAR
PB1 PB PB
PB2 Do not connect anything to this. PBR
FR-A8AP terminal
PZ1 PZ PZ
PZ2 Do not connect anything to this. PZR
PG PG 5E
SD SD AG2

 Wiring examples (standard models)

• Speed control
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-PR-SC or SF-V5RU), Standard motor with encoder (GM-DZ, GM-DP, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA,
12 V complementary or SF-HRCA), 5 V differential line driver

NFB MC SF-PR-SC, SF-V5RU

OCR Motor with encoder
A
＊ Inverter
Three-phase B
FAN U U
AC power C ＊
supply V V
NFB MC M
Inverter U U W W
R/L1 V V
Three-phase
S/L2 M E
AC power W W
supply T/L3 E Earth
Extemal Earth Thermal relay FR-A8AP (Ground)
thermal
Forward rotation start STF relay input＊PC (Ground)
protector PA1 C ＊
RH(OH) 2W1kΩ G1 ＊
Reverse rotation start STR PA2 R
SD G2
High speed RH
Multi-speed FR-A8AP
selection Middle speed RM PA1 A ＊ PB1 A
Low speed RL PA2 B PB2 N
Contact input common SD
PB1 C Differential Encoder
PZ1 B
PB2 D
10 PZ2
3 Encoder P ＊
2 DifferentialPZ1 F
Frequency command
2 PZ2 G Complementary
Frequency setting ＊ PG H
potentiometer 1 5 Terminating
Complementary PG S SD K
1/2W1kΩ resistor
Terminating SD R ON
resistor
PG
PG
ON ＊
SD ＊ 12 VDC∼24 VDC SD 5 VDC
＊ ＊ (+) (-) power supply ＊ (+) (-) power supply
OFF ＊
OFF ＊
＊

• Torque control
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-PR-SC or SF-V5RU), Standard motor with encoder (GM-DZ, GM-DP, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA,
12 V complementary or SF-HRCA), 5 V differential line driver

NFB MC SF-PR-SC, SF-V5RU

OCR Motor with encoder
＊
A Inverter
Three-phase B
FAN U U
AC power C ＊ V V
supply M
NFB MC
U U W W
Inverter
R/L1
Three-phase V V
M
E
S/L2 W W
AC power Earth
supply T/L3 E
Extemal Earth FR-A8AP (Ground)
thermal
Thermal relay PA1 C ＊
Forward rotation start PC (Ground)
STF relay input＊ protector
2W1kΩ G1 ＊
Reverse rotation start STR RH(OH) PA2 R
SD G2
High speed RH
Multi-speed FR-A8AP PB1 A
selection Middle speed RM PA1 A ＊
Low speed RL PA2 B PB2 N
Contact input common SD Differential Encoder
PB1 C PZ1 B
PB2 D
Speed limit command 3 10
Encoder
PZ2 P ＊
Frequency setting 2 Differential PZ1 F
2
Complementary
potentiometer PZ2 G ＊ PG H
1/2W1kΩ Terminating
1 5 Complementary PG S SD K
resistor
Terminating SD R ON
resistor
PG
ON
PG ＊
SD ＊ 12 VDC∼24 VDC
SD 5 VDC
(+) (-) power supply
＊ ＊ (+) (-) power supply OFF ＊
OFF ＊ ＊
＊

82 2. Installation and Wiring

2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
 • Position control
Vector control dedicated motor (SF-PR-SC or SF-V5RU),
12 V complementary
Standard motor with encoder (GM-DZ, GM-DP, SF-JR, SF-HR, SF-JRCA,
or SF-HRCA), 5 V differential line driver
1
MCCB MC SF-PR-SC, SF-V5RU Motor with encoder
OCR

2
A Inverter
＊
Three-phase B U U
FAN
AC power C ＊ V V
supply M
MCCB MC W W
Inverter U U
R/L1 V V E
Three-phase M
S/L2 W W
AC power Earth
T/L3 E

3
supply FR-A8AP (Ground)
External Earth
thermal (Ground)
Thermal relay PA1 C ＊
Forward rotation start STF relay input＊PC protector
Reverse rotation start RH(OH) 2W1kΩ G1 ＊ PA2 R
STR
SD G2
Point table selection RH
FR-A8AP PB1 A
RM PA1 A ＊
RL
PB2 N
PA2 B
Pre-excitation/servo on
Contact input common
LX
SD
PB1
PB2
C
D
Differential
PZ1
PZ2
B
P
Encoder

＊
4
Encoder
DifferentialPZ1 F Complementary
PZ2 G ＊
PG H
Terminating
Complementary PG S resistor SD K

5
ON
Terminating SD R PG
resistor ＊
ON
PG SD 5 VDC
SD ＊ 12 VDC to 24 VDC (+) (-) power supply
OFF ＊
＊ ＊ (+) (-) power supply ＊ ＊
OFF ＊

*1 The pin number differs according to the encoder used. 6

Speed and torque controls are available with or without the Z-phase being connected.
*2 Connect the encoder so that there is no looseness between the motor and motor shaft. Speed ratio must be 1:1.
*3 Earth (ground) the shield of the encoder cable to the enclosure using a tool such as a P-clip. (Refer to page 84.)
*4
*5
For the complementary, set the terminating resistor selection switches in the OFF position. (Refer to page 79.)
A separate external power supply is necessary according to the encoder power specification.
7
When the encoder output is the differential line driver type, only 5 V can be input.
Make the voltage of the external power supply the same as the encoder output voltage, and connect the external power supply between terminals

*6
PG and SD.
For terminal compatibility of the FR-JCBL, FR-V7CBL, and FR-A8AP, refer to page 82.
8
*7 A single-phase power supply (200 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz) is used for the fan for the dedicated motor (SF-V5RU).
*8 Connect the recommended 2 W 1 kΩ resistor between terminals PC and OH. (Recommended product: MOS2C102J 2W1kΩ by KOA Corporation)
Insert the input line and the resistor to a 2-wire blade terminal, and connect the blade terminal to terminal OH. (For the recommended 2-wire blade
terminals, refer to page 70.) 9
Remove jumpers connecting terminals PC and S1 and terminals PC and S2, and perform wiring as follows. Insulate the lead wire of the resistor,
for example by applying a contraction tube, and shape the wires so that the resistor and its lead wire do not touch other cables. Caulk the lead
wire securely together with the thermal protector input line using a 2-wire blade terminal. (Do not subject the lead wire's bottom area to an
excessive pressure.) 10
The thermal protector can be connected to the standard model and the Ethernet model only.
To use a terminal as terminal OH, assign the OH (External thermal relay input) signal to an input terminal. (Set "7" in any of Pr.178 to Pr.184.
For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
When OH signal is assigned to terminal RH (Pr.182 = “7”)
2-wire blade terminal PC
RH(OH)

To thermal protector
Insulate
2-wire blade terminal
Resistor (2 W1kΩ)
Insulate

*9 The SF-PR-SC does not have a cooling fan.

*10 Some SF-PR-SC models have a thermal protector.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
83
  Instructions for encoder cable wiring
• Use shielded twisted pair cables (0.2 mm2 or larger) to connect the FR-A8AP. For the wiring to terminals PG and SD, use
several cables in parallel or use a thick cable, according to the wiring length.
To protect the cables from noise, run them away from any source of noise (such as the main circuit and power supply
voltage).
Example of parallel connection
with two cables
(with complementary encoder output)
FR-E800
(FR-A8AP) Encoder
PA1 A
PA2 B
FB1 C
FB2 D
PZ1 F
PZ2 G

PG
S
SD R

2 mm2
PG

SD

Wiring length Parallel connection Larger-size cable

Within 10 m At least two cables in parallel 0.4 mm2 or larger
Wire gauge 0.2
Within 20 m At least four cables in parallel 0.75 mm2 or larger
mm2
Within 100 m*1 At least six cables in parallel 1.25 mm2 or larger

*1 When differential line driver is set and a wiring length is 30 m or more.

The wiring length can be extended to 100 m by increasing the 5 V power supply (approximately to 5.5 V) while using six or more 0.2 mm2 gauge
cables in parallel or a 1.25 mm2 or larger gauge cable. The voltage applied must be within power supply specifications of encoder.
• To reduce noise of the encoder cable, earth (ground) the encoder's shielded cable to the enclosure (as close as possible
to the inverter) with a metal P-clip or U-clip.
Earthing (grounding) example using a P-clip

Encoder cable
Shield
P-clip

• When one encoder is shared between the FR-A8AP and CNC (computerized numerical controller), its output signal should
be connected as follows. In this case, the wiring length between the FR-A8AP and CNC should be as short as possible,
within 5 m.
Inverter
(FR-A8AP) Encoder

CNC
Maximum 5 m
(two parallel cables)

NOTE
• For the details of the optional encoder dedicated cable (FR-JCBL/FR-V7CBL), refer to page 80.
• The FR-V7CBL is provided with a P-clip for earthing (grounding) shielded cables.

84 2. Installation and Wiring

2.7 Connection to a motor with encoder (Vector control)
2.8 Communication connectors and terminals 1

2.8.1 PU connector (Standard model) 2

 Mounting the operation panel on the enclosure surface
• Having an enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07) or a parameter unit on the enclosure surface is convenient. With 3
a connection cable, the operation panel or the parameter unit can be mounted to the enclosure surface and connected to
the inverter.
To connect the FR-PA07 or the parameter unit to the inverter, use an option FR-CB2[], or a connector (RJ-45 connector) 4
and cable (communication cable) available on the market.
Securely insert one end of the cable into the PU connector and the other end into the connection connector on the
parameter unit or the FR-ADP attached on the operation panel until the stoppers are fixed. 5

6
PU connector

7
STF FWD PU

Parameter unit
9
FR-PA07
(FR-PU07) (option)
Parameter unit connection cable
(FR-CB2[ ]) (option)

Operation panel (FR-LU08)

10
(option)

Operation panel connection

connector (FR-ADP)
(option)

NOTE
• Refer to the following table when fabricating the cable on the user side. Keep the total cable length within 20 m.

Name Remarks
Communication
Cable compliant with EIA-568 (such as 10BASE-T cable)
cable

 Communication operation
• Using the PU connector as a computer network port enables communication operation from a personal computer, etc.
When the PU connector is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program
can run to monitor the inverter or read and write parameters.
Communication can be performed with the Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link operation) or the MODBUS RTU
protocol.
For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Communication).

2. Installation and Wiring

2.8 Communication connectors and terminals
85
 2.8.2 Ethernet connector (Ethernet model / Safety
communication model)
 Ethernet communication specifications
Item Description
Category 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Data transmission speed 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX) / 10 Mbps (10BASE-T)
Transmission method Baseband
Maximum segment length 100 m between the hub and the inverter
Number of cascade connection
Up to 2 (100BASE-TX) / up to 4 (10BASE-T)
stages
Topology Line, star, or a combination of line and star
Interface RJ-45
Number of interfaces available 2
IP version IPv4

 Connection cable
Use Ethernet cables compliant with the following standards.
Ethernet cable Connector Standard
The cables compliant with the following standards:
Category 5 or higher straight cable (double
RJ-45 connector • IEEE 802.3 (100BASE-TX)
shielded / STP)
• ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B (Category 5)
• Recommended products (as of October 2020)
Model Manufacturer
Mitsubishi Electric System & Service
SC-E5EW series*1 Co., Ltd.

*1 SC-E5EW cable is for in-enclosure use and indoor use for fixed parts, SC-E5EW-MV cable for indoor use for moving parts, and SC-E5EW-L cable
for outdoor use.

NOTE
• Depending on the cable connector shape, the cable may not be connected to the inverter.

 Hubs
Use hubs that meet the following conditions. Operation is not guaranteed if the hubs do not meet these conditions.
• Compliance with the IEEE 802.3 (100BASE-TX)
• Support of the auto MDI/MDI-X function
• Support of the auto-negotiation function
• Switching hub (layer 2 switch)*1
*1 A repeater hub is not available.

NOTE
• Do not connect the FR-PA07, FR-LU08, FR-PU07, or any other operation panel or parameter unit to the Ethernet port. Doing
so may damage the inverter.
• For CC-Link IE TSN communication, the hubs can be used only for connection with units compliant with the authentication
class A.

86 2. Installation and Wiring

2.8 Communication connectors and terminals
 Wiring method
1

 Connection 5
1. Turn OFF the power of the programmable controller and the inverter.

2. Remove the inverter front cover.

6
3. Check the orientation of the connectors. Insert the connector part of the Ethernet cable to the communication
connector until it clicks.

 Disconnection 7
1. Turn OFF the power of the programmable controller and the inverter.

2. Remove the inverter front cover. 8

3. Hold down the latch on the Ethernet cable connector, and pull out the cable while holding the latch.

 Wiring precautions 9
This section explains Ethernet cable connection and the relevant precautions.

 Handling of the Ethernet cable

• Do not touch the conductors of the cable or the connector on the inverter. Keep the conductors free of dust or dirt. If oil
10
from your hand, dirt or dust is attached to the core, it can increase transmission loss, arising a problem in data link.
• Check the following:
Is any Ethernet cable disconnected?
Is any of the Ethernet cables shorted?
Are the connectors securely connected?
• Do not use Ethernet cables with broken latches. Doing so may cause the cable to unplug or malfunction.
• The maximum station-to-station distance is 100 m. However, the distance may be shorter depending on the operating
environment of the cable. For details of the cable, contact your cable manufacturer.

 Connecting and disconnecting of the Ethernet cable

Hold the connector part when connecting and disconnecting the Ethernet cable. Pulling a cable connected to the inverter may
damage the inverter or cable, or result in malfunction due to poor contact.

 Network configuration
Check the network configuration before wiring, and perform correct wiring.

 Communication operation
• Using the Ethernet connector as a computer network port enables communication operation from a computer. When the
inverter is connected with a personal, FA or other computer by a communication cable, a user program can run to monitor
the inverter or read and write parameters.
For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Communication).

2. Installation and Wiring

2.8 Communication connectors and terminals
87
 2.8.3 USB connector
 USB device communication
The inverter can be connected to a computer with a USB (ver. 1.1) cable.
Parameter setting and monitoring can be performed by using FR Configurator2.
Interface Conforms to USB1.1 (USB2.0 full speed)
Transmission speed 12 Mbps
Wiring length Maximum 5 m
Connector USB mini B connector (receptacle)
Power supply Self-powered or bus power connection
Recommended USB cable MR-J3USBCBL3M (cable length 3 m)

USB cable USB connector

NOTE
• For the details of FR Configurator2, refer to the Instruction Manual of FR Configurator2.

 USB bus power

Via USB connection, power supply from a computer to the inverter and communication to use FR Configurator2 are enabled
even while the inverter power is turned OFF. This will reduce the startup time.

 Restrictions for using USB bus power

The following table shows availability of functions while power is supplied via USB connection. Note that some functions are
restricted.
Item Description Remarks
Parameters (except for calibration Reading a parameter value Parameters for options can be read or written regardless of
parameters) Writing a parameter value whether options are connected.
FM/AM calibration parameter (Pr.900/
Setting (calibration) not available. —
Pr.901)
Adjustment is available only when
Calibration parameters Pr.902 to
applying analog voltage (current) is —
Pr.905, Pr.932, and Pr.933
not necessary.
When power is supplied via main circuit terminals while the
Not available for operation. Only the
Operation panel USB bus power is used, the operation panel will be reset
PRM LED turns ON.
automatically.
Fault Partially supported.
RS-485/Ethernet communication Not guaranteed. —

NOTE
• Availability of each parameter depends on the inverter model. For details, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).
• Note that Ethernet communication may be disabled in the FR-E800-E inverter when turning OFF and turning ON the power
supply is repeated while Ethernet communication and USB bus power connection are used at the same time. Disconnect the
USB cable before turning OFF/ON the power supply.

88 2. Installation and Wiring

2.8 Communication connectors and terminals
2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units 1

The inverter accepts a variety of stand-alone option units as required.

Incorrect connection will cause inverter damage or accident. Connect and operate the option unit carefully in accordance with 2
the Instruction Manual of the corresponding option unit.

2.9.1 Connection of the brake resistor (FR-E820- 3

0030(0.4K) or higher, FR-E840-0016(0.4K) or
higher, and FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) or higher) 4
• Install a dedicated brake resistor (MRS, MYS, or FR-ABR) outside when the motor driven by the inverter is made to run by
the load, quick deceleration is required, etc. Connect the brake resistor (MRS, MYS, or FR-ABR) to terminals P/+ and PR. 5
(For the locations of terminals P/+ and PR, refer to the terminal block layout (page 51).)
Set parameters as follows.

Connected brake resistor

Setting of Pr.30 Regenerative Setting of Pr.70 Special regenerative 6
function selection brake duty
MRS, MYS 0 (initial value) —
MYS used at 100% torque / 6%ED 1 6%
FR-ABR 1 10% 7
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) to 0175(3.7K)
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) to 0050(0.75K), FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0095(3.7K)
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K) to 0110(2.2K) 8
Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR.
Jumper  Terminal P/+
Terminal P/+
Jumper 
9
Terminal PR

Terminal PR

10

Brake resistor
Brake resistor

FR-E820-0240(5.5K), 0330(7.5K) FR-E840-5.5K(0120), 7.5K(0170)

Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR.
Jumper 
Terminal P/+
Terminal P/+
Terminal PR

Jumper  Terminal PR Brake resistor

Brake resistor

2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
89
 FR-E820-0470(11K), FR-E820-0600(15K) FR-E840-0230(11K), FR-E840-0300(15K)
Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR. Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR.
Jumper *1 Jumper *1
Terminal P/+ Terminal P/+
Terminal PR

Terminal PR

Brake resistor

Brake resistor

FR-E820-0760(18.5K), FR-E820-0900(22K)
FR-E840-0380(18.5K), FR-E840-0440(22K)
Connect a brake resistor across terminals P/+ and PR.
Jumper *1
Terminal P/+
Terminal PR

Brake resistor

*1 Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).

NOTE
• A brake resistor cannot be used with options such as brake units, high power factor converters, and multifunction regeneration
converters.

 Connecting the MRS or MYS brake resistor or the FR-ABR high-duty

brake resistor
It is recommended to configure a sequence, which shuts off power on the input side of the inverter by the external thermal relay
as follows, to prevent overheat and burnout of the brake resistor (MRS, MYS) or the high duty brake resistor (FR-ABR) in case
the regenerative brake transistor is damaged. (Not available for FR-E820(S)-0008(0.1K) and FR-E820(S)-0015(0.2K).)

<Example 1> Thermal relay <Example 2> Thermal relay

MC Inverter (OCR)(∗1) FR-ABR MC Inverter (OCR)(∗1) FR-ABR
R/L1 P/+ R Power R/L1 P/+ R
Power
Supply S/L2 Supply S/L2
T/L3 T/L3
T T
PR PR
F F
B
MC MC
ON OFF ON OFF
C
OCR OCR
MC Contact MC Contact

90 2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
 *1 Refer to the following table for the thermal relay models for each capacity. Refer to the following diagram for the connection.

Power
supply Brake resistor
Thermal relay
model (Mitsubishi Rated operating current
1
voltage Electric product)
MRS120W200 TH-T25-0.7A 120 VAC: 2 A (NO contact) / 3 A (NC
MRS120W100 TH-T25-1.3A contact), 2
MRS120W60 TH-T25-2.1A 240 VAC: 1 A (NO contact) / 2 A (NC
200 V
MRS120W40 TH-T25-3.6A contact) (AC15 class)
110 VDC: 0.2 A, 220 VDC: 0.1 A (DC13
MYS220W50
(two in parallel)
TH-T25-5A class) 3
Thermal relay
Power
High-duty brake model
supply Rated operating current
voltage
resistor (Mitsubishi electric
product)
4
FR-ABR-0.4K TH-T25-0.7A
FR-ABR-0.75K TH-T25-1.3A
FR-ABR-2.2K TH-T25-2.1A 1/L1 5/L3
5
FR-ABR-3.7K TH-T25-3.6A
200 V FR-ABR-5.5K TH-T25-5A
FR-ABR-7.5K TH-T25-6.6A
FR-ABR-11K TH-T25-11A
2/T1 6/T3 6
120 VAC: 2 A (NO contact) / 3 A (NC To the inverter To the ABR
FR-ABR-15K TH-T25-11A P/+ terminal
FR-ABR-22K TH-T65-22A contact),
FR-ABR-H0.4K TH-T25-0.24A
240 VAC: 1 A (NO contact) / 2 A (NC
contact) (AC15 class) 7
FR-ABR-H0.75K TH-T25-0.35A 110 VDC: 0.2 A, 220 VDC: 0.1 A (DC13
FR-ABR-H1.5K TH-T25-0.9A class)
FR-ABR-H2.2K TH-T25-1.3A
FR-ABR-H3.7K TH-T25-2.1A 8
400 V
FR-ABR-H5.5K TH-T25-2.5A
FR-ABR-H7.5K TH-T25-3.6A
FR-ABR-H11K TH-T25-6.6A 9
FR-ABR-H15K TH-T25-6.6A
FR-ABR-H22K TH-T25-9A

NOTE 10
• Do not use the brake resistor (MRS type, MYS type) with a lead wire extended.
• Do not connect a resistor to terminals P/+ and N/-. Doing so may cause a fire.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
91
  Connection of a brake resistor other than the FR-ABR
Use a brake resistor that has resistance and power consumption values higher than the following. Also, the brake resistor must
have a sufficient capacity to consume the regenerative power.
Voltage Minimum resistance Power consumption
Inverter
class (Ω) (kW)
FR-E820-0030(0.4K)*1 100 1.5
FR-E820- 80 1.9
0050(0.75K)*1
FR-E820-0080(1.5K) 60 2.5
FR-E820-0110(2.2K) 60 2.5
Three-phase FR-E820-0175(3.7K) 40 3.8
200 V class FR-E820-0240(5.5K) 25 6.1
FR-E820-0330(7.5K) 20 7.6
FR-E820-0470(11K) 13 11.7
FR-E820-0600(15K) 9 16.9
FR-E820-0760(18.5K) 6.5 23.4
FR-E820-0900(22K) 6.5 23.4
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) 371 1.6
FR-E840-0026(0.75K) 236 2.4
FR-E840-0040(1.5K) 205 2.8
FR-E840-0060(2.2K) 180 3.2
FR-E840-0095(3.7K) 130 4.4
Three-phase
FR-E840-0120(5.5K) 94 6.1
400 V class
FR-E840-0170(7.5K) 67 8.6
FR-E840-0230(11K) 49 11.8
FR-E840-0300(15K) 36 16.0
FR-E840-0380(18.5K) 26 22.2
FR-E840-0440(22K) 26 22.2
FR-E820S- 100 1.5
0030(0.4K)*1
Single- FR-E820S- 80 1.9
phase 200 V
class 0050(0.75K)*1
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) 60 2.5
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K) 60 2.5

*1 The resistance should be 200 Ω or more at 100% ED. The following shows the brake duty when the resistance is less than 200 Ω.

Brake duty (% ED) 120

100% ED (at 200 Ω or more)
100
80
FR-E820(S)-0050(0.75K)
60 (80 Ω at minimum)
40 30%ED
30 FR-E820(S)-0030(0.4K)
20
(100 Ω at minimum)
0
60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220
Minimum brake resistance (Ω)
Set parameters as follows:
• Pr.30 Regenerative function selection = "1"
• Set Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty according to the amount and frequency of the regenerative driving, and make
sure that the resistor can consume the regenerative power properly. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)

92 2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
 • When the regenerative brake transistor is damaged, install a thermal relay as shown in the following sequence to prevent
overheat and burnout of the brake resistor. Properly select a thermal relay according to the regenerative driving frequency
or the rated power or resistance of the brake resistor.
1

<Example 1>
2
Thermal relay <Example 2> Thermal relay
MC Inverter (OCR) Brake resistor MC Inverter (OCR) Brake resistor
Power R/L1 P/+ R R/L1 P/+ R
Power
Supply S/L2 Supply S/L2
T/L3 T/L3

3
T T
PR PR
F F
B
MC MC
ON OFF ON OFF
C
OCR OCR
MC Contact MC Contact
4
CAUTION
• If the resistor selection is incorrect, overcurrent may damage the inverter built-in brake transistor. Besides, the resistor 5
may be burned due to overheat.
• If the selection of the thermal relay is incorrect, the resistor may be burned due to overheat.
6
2.9.2 Connection of the brake unit (FR-BU2)
Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2(-H)) as follows to improve the braking capability during deceleration.
7
 Connection example with the GRZG type discharging resistor
OCR
ON OFF contact
8
T ∗2
MC MC

OCR
GRZG type ∗5
discharging
resistor
9
MCCB MC R R
R/L1 U Motor External thermal
Three-phase AC
S/L2 V M relay ∗4
power supply
T/L3 W 10
Inverter FR-BU2
∗3 PR A
∗1
P/+ P/+ B
∗1
N/- N/- C
BUE
∗3
SD
10 m or less
*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU2). (Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*3 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and discharging resistor must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use
the cable within 10 m.
*4 It is recommended to install an external thermal relay to prevent overheat of the discharging resistor.
*5 For the connection method of the discharging resistor, refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-BU2.
• Recommended external thermal relay
Recommended external
brake unit Discharging resistor
thermal relay
FR-BU2-1.5K GZG 300W-50Ω (one) TH-T25 1.3A

FR-BU2-3.7K GRZG 200-10Ω (three in series) TH-T25 3.6A 1/L1 5/L3

FR-BU2-7.5K GRZG 300-5Ω (four in series) TH-T25 6.6A

FR-BU2-15K GRZG 400-2Ω (six in series) TH-T25 11A

FR-BU2-H7.5K GRZG 200-10Ω (six in series) TH-T25 3.6A 2/T1 6/T3

FR-BU2-H15K GRZG 300-5Ω (eight in series) TH-T25 6.6A To the brake To a resistor
FR-BU2-H30K GRZG 400-2Ω (twelve in series) TH-T25 11A unit terminal P/+

2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
93
 NOTE
• Set "1" in Pr.0 Brake mode selection in the FR-BU2 to use a GRZG type discharging resistor.
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).

 Connection example with the FR-BR(-H) resistor unit

ON OFF

T ∗2
MC MC

FR-BR
MCCB MC
R/L1 U Motor P TH1 ∗4
Three phase AC
power supply S/L2 V M PR
T/L3 W TH2
∗3

Inverter FR-BU2
PR A
P/+ P/+ B
∗1
N/- N/- C
BUE
∗3 SD
10 m or less

*1 When wiring, make sure to match the terminal symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the brake unit (FR-BU2). (Incorrect connection will
damage the inverter and brake unit.)
*2 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.
*3 The wiring distance between the inverter, brake unit (FR-BU2) and resistor unit (FR-BR) must be within 5 m. When using twisted pair cable, use
the cable within 10 m.
*4 The contact between TH1 and TH2 is closed in the normal status and is open at a fault.

NOTE
• Do not remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor (FR-HEL).

2.9.3 Connection of the high power factor converter (FR-

HC2) (Standard model / Ethernet model)
When connecting the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) to suppress power harmonics, perform wiring securely as follows.
Incorrect connection will damage the high power factor converter and the inverter.
After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set the rated motor voltage in Pr.19 Base frequency voltage (under
V/F control) or Pr.83 Rated motor voltage (under other than V/F control) and set "0 (initial value)" or "2" (when the automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure is selected) in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).)

High power
Outside box factor converter
Reactor1 (FR-HCB2) Reactor2 (FR-HC2) Inverter
MCCB MC (FR-HCL21) (FR-HCL22)

 R/  R2/ R3/  R3/ R4/  R/L1 Motor
R2/ R4/L14
L1 L12 L12 L13 L13 L14 U
Three-phase S/L2
S/ S2/ S2/ S3/ S3/ S4/ T/L3 V M
AC power L2 L22 L23 L23 L24 S4/L24 W
L22
supply T3/
T/ T2/ T2/ T3/ T4/
L3 L32 L32 L33 L33 L34 T4/L34
Earth
P1
  (ground)
Fuse 
ROH1 ROH P/+ P/+ 
ROH2 SD N/- N/-
88R 88R
RDY X10  
88S 88S
R/L1
 S/L2  RSO RES 
T/L3
R1/L11 SE SD 
S1/L21 


*1 Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3). Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.
*2 Do not install an MCCB across terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P and P/+ or between terminals N and N/-). Connecting the opposite
polarity of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.

94 2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
 *3 Use Pr.178 to Pr.182 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 and RES signals. (Refer to the FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Function).)
*4 Always connect terminal RDY on the FR-HC2 to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned on the inverter. Always connect 1
terminal SE on the FR-HC2 to terminal SD on the inverter. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-HC2.
*5 Always connect terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 on the FR-HC2 to the power supply. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage
the FR-HC2.
*6 Do not install an MCCB or MC across terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) on the reactor 1 and terminals (R4/L14, S4/L24, T4/L34) on the FR-HC2. Doing
so disrupts proper operation.
2
*7 Securely perform grounding (earthing) by using the grounding (earthing) terminal.
*8 Installation of a fuse is recommended. (Refer to the Instruction Manual of the FR-HC2.)

NOTE 3
• The safety communication model (FR-E800-SCE) is not intended for the use with the high power factor converter (FR-HC2).
• The voltage phases of terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 and the voltage phases of terminals R4/L14, S4/L24, and T4/L34 must
be matched.
• The control logic (sink logic/source logic) of the high power factor converter and the inverter must be matched. (Refer to page
4
67.)
• Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when the FR-HC2 is connected.
5
CAUTION
• Always connect terminal RDY on the FR-HC2 to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned on the 6
inverter. Always connect terminal SE on the FR-HC2 to terminal SD on the inverter. Not connecting these terminals may
damage the FR-HC2.
7
2.9.4 Connection of the multifunction regeneration
converter (FR-XC) (Standard model / Ethernet 8
model)
When connecting the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-XC) to improve the braking capability, perform wiring securely
as follows. Failure to do so will damage the converter and the inverter.
9
Turn ON switch 1 in the function selection switch assembly (SW2). If the switch setting does not match the actual wiring, the
connection mode fault "E.T" occurs. Set "0" in Pr.416 of the FR-XC converter.
After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure,
10
set "0" or "2" (when the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure is selected) in Pr.30 Regenerative function
selection, and set "0" in Pr.70 Special regenerative brake duty. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)

 Common bus regeneration mode with harmonic suppression disabled

(Pr.416 = "0")
Inverter

R/L1 U
FR-XC S/L2 V
IM
M
T/L3 W
 P4
FR-XCL  
NFB MC P1
Fuse  R/L1 R2/L12 R2/L12

Power Fuse  S/L2 S2/L22 S2/L22 P/+ Fuse P/+  

supply Fuse  T/L3 T2/L32 T2/L32

N/- Fuse N/-

SOURCE

SINK
  R/L1
Open collector

RYA
S/L2 RYB X10(MRS)
 T/L3 RSO RES 
SE SD
R1/L11 C
S1/L21 B
A
PU
RES connector
SOF
LOH
SD

*1 Never connect the power supply to terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 on the inverter. Doing so will damage the inverter and the converter.

2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
95
 *2 When the FR-XC is connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 does not affect the function. (The FR-XC can be connected with the
jumper connected.)
*3 Connect between the inverter terminal P/+ and the converter terminal P/+ and between the inverter terminal N/- and the converter terminal N/-
for polarity consistency. Failure to do so will damage the converter and the inverter.
*4 Confirm the correct phase sequence of three-phase current to connect between the reactor and the converter, and between the power supply
and terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Failure to do so will damage the converter.
*5 Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3 of the converter. Operating the inverter without connecting them will
damage the converter.
*6 Do not connect anything to terminal P4.
*7 Assign the X10 signal to any of the input terminals.
*8 To use separate power supply for the control circuit, remove each jumper at terminal R1/L11 and terminal S1/L21.
*9 Install UL listed fuses on the input side of the reactor to meet the UL/cUL standards (refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual for information about
the fuse).
*10 Do not install an MCCB or MC between the reactor and the converter. Doing so disrupts proper operation.

CAUTION
• In the common bus regeneration mode, always connect between the converter terminal RYB and the inverter terminal
to which the X10 (MRS) signal is assigned and between the converter terminal SE and the inverter terminal SD. Failure
to do so will damage the converter.

NOTE
• Configure a system so that the magnetic contactor at the converter input side shuts off the power supply at a failure of the
converter or the connected inverter. (The converter does not shut off the power supply by itself.) Failure to do so may overheat
and burn the resistors in the converter and the connected inverter.
• The safety communication model (FR-E800-SCE) is not intended for the use with the multifunction regeneration converter (FR-
XC) except when the converter is used in power regeneration mode.
• For details on model selection and connection, refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual.
• For details on connection in common bus regeneration mode with harmonic suppression enabled or in power regeneration
mode 2, refer to the FR-XC Instruction Manual.

2.9.5 Connection of the power regeneration common

converter (FR-CV) (Standard model / Ethernet
model)
When wiring for connecting the power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) to the inverter, make sure to match the terminal
symbols (P/+, N/-) on the inverter and on the power regeneration common converter.
After making sure that the wiring is correct and secure, set "0 (initial value)" or "2" (when the automatic restart after
instantaneous power failure is selected) in Pr.30 Regenerative function selection. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual
(Function).)

R/L1 U
S/L2 
T/L3 V M
W

Dedicated stand-alone FR-CV type

reactor (FR-CVL) Power regeneration Inverter
common converter
MCCB MC1
R/L11 R2/L12
Three-phase R2/L1 P1
AC power S/L21 S2/L22
S2/L2 P/L+ P/+  
supply T/L31 T2/L32
T2/L3 N/L- N/-

P24 PC
R/L11
SD SD
S/L21 
RDYA
T/MC1 
RDYB X10
RSO RES
SE
*1 Do not connect anything to power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3). Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. (The E.OPT fault (Option
fault) occurs. Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Maintenance).)
*2 When the FR-CV is connected, the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 does not affect the function. (The FR-CV can be connected with the
jumper connected.)

96 2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
 *3 Do not install an MCCB across terminals P/+ and N/- (between terminals P/L+ and P/+ or between N/L- and N/-). Connecting the opposite polarity
of terminals N/- and P/+ will damage the inverter.
*4 Use Pr.178 to Pr.182 (Input terminal function selection) to assign the terminals used for the X10 signal. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction 1
Manual (Function).)
*5 Be sure to connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1. Operating the inverter without connecting them will damage the
power regeneration common converter.
*6 Always connect terminal RDYB on the FR-CV to a terminal where the X10 signal or MRS signal is assigned on the inverter. Always connect
terminal SE on the FR-CV to terminal SD on the inverter. Not connecting these terminals may damage the FR-CV.
2
NOTE
• The safety communication model (FR-E800-SCE) is not intended for the use with the power regeneration common converter
(FR-CV).
3
• The voltage phases of terminals R/L11, S/L21, and T/MC1 and the voltage phases of terminals R2/L1, S2/L2, and T2/L3 must
be matched.
• Use the sink logic when the FR-CV is connected. It cannot be connected when the source logic is selected. 4
• Do not connect a DC reactor (FR-HEL) to the inverter when the FR-CV is connected.

2.9.6 Connection of the DC reactor (FR-HEL) 5

• Keep the surrounding air temperature within the permissible range (-10 to +50°C). Keep enough clearance around the
reactor because it heats up. (Take 10 cm or more clearance on top and bottom and 5 cm or more on left and right 6
regardless of the installation direction.)

10 cm or more
7

8
5 cm or 5 cm or 5 cm or 5 cm or
more more more more

• When using the DC reactor (FR-HEL), connect it to terminals P/+ and P1. 9
In this case, the jumper connected across terminals P/+ and P1 must be removed. Otherwise, the reactor will not be
effective.

P1 P/+ 10
FR-HEL
Remove
the jumper

• Select a DC reactor according to the applied motor capacity. (Refer to page 120.)
• Since the DC reactor (FR-HEL) is electrically connected to the enclosure through mounting screws, the DC reactor is
earthed (grounded) by being securely mounted to the enclosure. However, if the DC reactor is not earthed (grounded)
securely enough, an earthing (grounding) cable may be used.

NOTE
• The wiring distance must be within 5 m.
• As a reference, the cable gauge for the connection must be equal to or larger than that of the power cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
and the earthing (grounding) cable. (Refer to page 54.)

2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
97
 MEMO

98 2. Installation and Wiring

2.9 Connection of stand-alone option units
 CHAPTER 3
CHAPTER 3 Precautions for Use of the
Inverter 4

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents ..................................................................................100

3.2 Power supply harmonics.......................................................................................................................................105
6
3.3 Installation of a reactor .........................................................................................................................................109
3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)....................................................................................................110
3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation........................................................112
7
3.6 Checklist before starting operation .......................................................................................................................113
3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter ...............................................................................................................116
8

10

99
 3 Precautions for Use of the Inverter
This chapter explains the precautions for use of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage

currents

3.1.1 Leakage currents and countermeasures

Capacitances exist between the inverter I/O cables, other cables and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage current
flows. Since its value depends on the static capacitances, carrier frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation at the increased
carrier frequency of the inverter will increase the leakage current. Therefore, take the following countermeasures. Select the
earth leakage current breaker according to its rated sensitivity current, independently of the carrier frequency setting.

 To-earth (ground) leakage currents

Leakage currents may flow not only into the power system of the inverter but also into the other power systems through the
earthing (grounding) cable, etc. These leakage currents may operate earth leakage circuit breakers and earth leakage relays
unnecessarily.

 Precautions
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
• By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed to suppress harmonics and surge voltage in the power system of the
inverter and other power systems, operation can be performed with the carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).

NOTE
• Long wiring will increase the leakage current.
• High motor capacity will increase the leakage current. The leakage current of the 400 V class is larger than that of the 200 V
class.

 Line-to-line leakage currents

Harmonics of leakage currents flowing in static capacitances between the inverter output cables may operate the external
thermal relay unnecessarily. When the wiring length is long (50 m or more) for the 400 V class small-capacity models (FR-
E840-0170(7.5K) or lower), the external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily because the ratio of the leakage current
to the rated motor current increases.

 Line-to-line leakage current example (200 V class)

Motor capacity Rated motor Leakage current (mA)*1
Condition
(kW) current (A) Wiring length 50 m Wiring length 100 m
0.4 1.8 310 500
0.75 3.2 340 530
• Motor: SF-JR 4P
1.5 5.8 370 560
• Carrier frequency: 14.5 kHz
2.2 8.1 400 590
• Cable: 2 mm2, 4 cores
3.7 12.8 440 630
• Cabtyre cable
5.5 19.4 490 680
7.5 25.6 535 725

*1 The leakage currents of the 400 V class are about twice as large.

100 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
 MCCB MC Thermal relay
Motor
Power
Inverter M
1
supply

Line-to-line static

Line-to-line leakage currents path

capacitances
2
 Precautions
• Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr.72 PWM frequency selection setting. 3
Note that motor noise increases. Selecting Pr.240 Soft-PWM operation selection makes the sound inoffensive.
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a temperature sensor
to directly detect motor temperature. 4
 Installation and selection of the molded case circuit breaker
Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power receiving side to protect the wiring at the inverter input side. Select
an MCCB according to the inverter input side power factor, which depends on the power supply voltage, output frequency and
5
load. Especially for a completely electromagnetic MCCB, a slightly large capacity must be selected since its operation
characteristic varies with harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding breaker.) As an earth leakage current
breaker, use the Mitsubishi earth leakage current breaker designed for harmonics and surge suppression.
6
 Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage circuit
breaker 7
To install the earth leakage circuit breaker on the inverter circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows, independently of
the PWM carrier frequency.
• Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial 8
Rated sensitivity current power supply operation
IΔn ≥ 10 × (Ig1 + Ign + Igi + Ig2 + Igm) Ign: Leakage current from noise filters on the input side of the
• Standard breaker inverter 9
Rated sensitivity current Igm: Leakage current from the motor during commercial power
IΔn ≥ 10 × {Ig1 + Ign + Igi + 3 × (Ig2 + Igm)} supply operation
Igi: Leakage current of inverter unit 10
Example of leakage current of Example of leakage current of cable path Leakage current example of three-
Leakage current example of per 1km during the commercial power supply phase induction motor during the
cable path per 1 km during the
three-phase induction motor operation when the CV cable is routed in commercial power supply operation
commercial power supply operation
during the commercial metal conduit
when the CV cable is routed in (Totally-enclosed fan-cooled
power supply operation (Three-phase three-wire delta
metal conduit connection 400 V 60 Hz) type motor 400 V 60 Hz)
(200 V 60 Hz)
(200 V 60 Hz)
Leakage currents (mA)

Leakage currents (mA)

120 2. 0
2.0
Leakage currents (mA)
Leakage currents (mA)

120 100 1. 0
100 80 0. 7
1.0 0. 5
80 0.7 60
0.5 0. 3
60 40
0. 2
0.3 20
40
0.2 0 0. 1
20 2 3.5 8 142238 80150 1. 5 3. 7 7. 5 15223755
0 0.1 5.5 30 60 100 2. 2 5.5 1118. 53045
2 3.5 8 14 2238 80150 1.5 3.7 7.5 15223755 Cable size (mm )2
Motor capacity (kW)
5.5 30 60 100 2.2 5.5 11 18.5 3045
Cable size (mm2) Motor capacity (kW) For " " connection, the amount of leakage current is approx. 1/3 of the above value.

Breaker designed
Item for harmonic and Standard breaker
Example surge suppression
5.5 mm2 5m 5.5 mm2 50 m 5m = 0.17
Leakage current Ig1 (mA) 33 ×
1000m
ELB Noise
filter
3φ Leakage current Ign (mA) 0 (without noise filter)
Inverter M 200 V
2.2 kW Leakage current Igi (mA) 1 (without EMC filter)
Ig1 Ign Ig2 Igm 50m = 1.65
Leakage current Ig2 (mA) 33 ×
Igi 1000m
Motor leakage current Igm (mA) 0.18
Total leakage current (mA) 3.00 6.66
Rated sensitivity current (mA) (≥ Ig
30 100
× 10)

3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
101
 NOTE
• Install the earth leakage circuit breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter.
• In the connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt against a ground fault in the inverter output side.
Earthing (Grounding) must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and electrical codes. (NEC
section 250, IEC 61140 class 1 and other applicable standards)
• When the breaker is installed on the output side of the inverter, it may be unnecessarily operated by harmonics even if the
effective value is within the rating.
In this case, do not install the breaker since the eddy current and hysteresis loss will increase, leading to temperature rise.
• The following models and products are standard breakers: the models BV-C1, BC-V, NVB, NV-L, NV-G2N, NV-G3NA, and
NV-2F, the earth leakage circuit breakers with AA neutral wire open-phase protection, and the earth leakage relays (except
NV-ZHA).
The other series, models, and products are designed for harmonic and surge suppression: the NV-C series, NV-S series, MN
series, the models NV30-FA, NV50-FA, NV-H, and BV-C2, earth leakage alarm breaker NF-Z, and the earth leakage relay NV-
ZHA.

3.1.2 Techniques and measures for electromagnetic

compatibility (EMC)
Some electromagnetic noises enter the inverter to cause the inverter malfunction, and others are radiated by the inverter to
cause the peripheral devices to malfunction. (The former is called EMS problem, the latter is called EMI problem, and both is
called EMC problem.) Though the inverter is designed to be immune to noises, it requires the following basic measures and
EMS measures as it handles low-level signals. Pay attention to the electromagnetic noises that could be generated by the
inverter since the inverter chops outputs at high carrier frequency. If these electromagnetic noises cause peripheral devices to
malfunction, EMI countermeasures should be taken to suppress noises. These techniques differ slightly depending on EMI
paths.

 Basic measures
• Do not run the power cables (I/O cables) and signal cables of the inverter in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
• Use shielded twisted pair cables for the detector connecting and control signal cables and connect the sheathes of the
shielded cables to terminal SD.
• Ground (Earth) the inverter, motor, etc. at one point.

 EMS measures to reduce electromagnetic noises that enter the inverter

and cause it to malfunction
When devices that generate many electromagnetic noises (which use magnetic contactors, electromagnetic brakes, many
relays, for example) are installed near the inverter and the inverter may malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, the
following countermeasures must be taken:
• Provide surge suppressors for devices that generate many electromagnetic noises to suppress electromagnetic noises.
• Install data line filters to signal cables (refer to page 103).
• Ground (Earth) the shields of the detector connection and control signal cables with cable clamp metal.

102 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
 EMI measures to reduce electromagnetic noises that are radiated by the
inverter to cause the peripheral devices to malfunction 1
Inverter-generated noises are largely classified into those radiated by the inverter itself and by the I/O cables connected to its
main circuit, those electromagnetically and electrostatically induced to the signal cables of the peripheral devices close to the
power cable connected to the inverter main circuit, and those transmitted through the power cables. 2
Inverter generated
Air propagated Noise directly
electromagnetic Path (a)
3
noise radiated from inverter
noise
Noise radiated from
power supply cable
Path (b)
(e) Telephone
Noise radiated from
Path (c)
motor connection cable

(g) (g)
4
Electromagnetic
Path (d), (e) (b)
induction noise
(a) Sensor
Electrostatic
induction noise
Path (f)
Instrument Receiver (c) Inverter
power supply
5
Electrical path Noise propagated through (f) (a) (f)
Path (g)
propagated noise power supply cable (d)

6
Noise from earthing
(grounding) cable due to Path (h) (c) Sensor
leakage current Motor M

Noise propagation
Countermeasure 7
path
When devices that handle low-level signals and are liable to malfunction due to electromagnetic noises, e.g.
instruments, receivers and sensors, are contained in the enclosure that contains the inverter or when their signal
cables are run near the inverter, the devices may malfunction due to by air-propagated electromagnetic noises. The
following countermeasures must be taken:
8
• Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
• Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables.
(a), (b), (c) • Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
9
• Install an external EMC filter.
• Install a line noise filter or radio noise filter on the input side and install a line noise filter on the output side to
suppress the radiated noise from the cables.
• Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further 10
effects.
When the signal cables are run in parallel with or bundled with the power cables, magnetic and static induction noises
may be propagated to the signal cables to cause malfunction of the devices and the following countermeasures must
be taken:
• Install easily affected devices as far away as possible from the inverter.
(d), (e), (f) • Run easily affected signal cables as far away as possible from the inverter and its I/O cables.
• Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel with each other and do not bundle
them.
• Use shielded cables as signal cables and power cables and run them in individual metal conduits to produce further
effects.
When the power supplies of the peripheral devices are connected to the power supply of the inverter in the same
power system, inverter-generated noises may flow back through the power supply cables to cause malfunction of the
(g) devices and the following countermeasures must be taken:
• Install an external EMC filter.
• Install the line noise filter (FR-BLF/FR-BSF01) to the power cables (output cables) of the inverter.
When a closed loop circuit is formed by connecting the peripheral device wiring to the inverter, leakage currents may
(h) flow through the earthing (grounding) cable of the inverter to cause the device to malfunction. In that case,
disconnecting the earthing (grounding) cable from the device may stop the malfunction of the device.

 Data line filter

Data line filter is effective as an EMI countermeasure. Provide a data line filter for the detector cable, etc.
• Commercially available data line filter: ZCAT3035-1330 (by TDK), ESD-SR-250 (by TOKIN)

3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
103
 • Specification example (ZCAT3035-1330 by TDK)
Item Description
10 to 100 MHz 80
Impedance (Ω)
100 to 500 MHz 150

39 1 Cable fixing band

13 1
mount
34 1

Outline dimension drawings

30 1
(mm)
TDK

Product name Lot number

The impedance values above are reference values, and not guaranteed values.

 EMI measure example

Enclosure Decrease carrier frequency. Install filter (FR-BLF
or FR-BSF01) on
Inverter inverter output side.
power EMC FR-
Inverter BLF M Motor
supply filter
Use 4-core cable for motor
Separate inverter and power cable and use one cable
power line by more than as earth (ground) cable.
30 cm (at least 10 cm)
from sensor circuit. Use a twisted pair shielded cable.
Control Power Sensor
power supply for
supply sensor
Do not earth (ground) Do not earth (ground) shield but
enclosure directly. connect it to signal common cable.
Do not earth (ground) control cable.

NOTE
• For compliance with the EU EMC Directive, refer to the document enclosed with the product.

104 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.1 Electro-magnetic interference (EMI) and leakage currents
3.2 Power supply harmonics 1

3.2.1 Power supply harmonics 2

The inverter may generate power supply harmonics from its converter circuit to affect the power generator, power factor
correction capacitor etc. Power supply harmonics are different from noise and leakage currents in source, frequency band and 3
transmission path. Take the following countermeasure suppression techniques.
• Differences between harmonics and noises
Item Harmonics Noise 4
Normally 40th to 50th degrees or less (3
frequency High frequency (several 10 kHz to 1 GHz order).
kHz or less).
Location To-electric channel, power impedance. To-space, distance, wiring path.
Quantitative understanding Theoretical calculation possible. Random occurrence, quantitative grasping difficult. 5
Changes with the current variation ratio. (Gets
Generated amount Nearly proportional to the load capacity.
larger as switching speed increases.)

Affected equipment immunity Specified by standards per equipment.

Different depending on maker's equipment
specifications. 6
Countermeasure Provide a reactor. Increase distance.

• Countermeasures
7
The harmonic current generated from the inverter to the input side differs according to various conditions such as the wiring
impedance, whether a reactor is used or not, and output frequency and output current on the load side.
For the output frequency and output current, we understand that this should be calculated in the conditions under the rated
load at the maximum operating frequency.
8

DC reactor
(FR-HEL)
9

MCCB MC P/+ P1 10
Power supply

R X
R/L1 U
S Y
S/L2 V M
T Z
T/L3 W
AC reactor Inverter Do not install power
(FR-HAL)
factor improving capacitor.

NOTE
• The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the
harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent
protection, do not provide a capacitor and surge suppressor on the inverter output side when the motor is driven by the inverter.
For power factor improvement, install a reactor on the inverter input side or in the DC circuit.

3.2.2 Harmonic suppression guidelines in Japan

Inverters have a converter section (rectifier circuit) and generate a harmonic current.
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point via a power transformer. The Harmonic Suppression
Guidelines was established to protect other consumers from these outgoing harmonic currents.

3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.2 Power supply harmonics
105
 The three-phase 200 V input specifications 3.7 kW or lower (or single-phase 200 V input specifications 2.2 kW or lower) were
previously covered by the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Household Appliances and General-purpose Products and
other models were covered by the Harmonic Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special
High Voltage. However, the transistorized inverter has been excluded from the target products covered by the Harmonic
Suppression Guidelines for Household Appliances and General-purpose Products in January 2004 and the Harmonic
Suppression Guideline for Household Appliances and General-purpose Products was repealed on September 6, 2004.
All capacity and all models of general-purpose inverter used by specific consumers are now covered by "the Harmonic
Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High Voltage or Special High Voltage" (hereinafter referred to as "the
Specific Consumer Guidelines").
• "Specific Consumer Guidelines"
This guideline sets forth the maximum harmonic currents outgoing from a high-voltage or especially high-voltage receiving
consumer who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any of the maximum values is exceeded, this
guideline requires that consumer to take certain suppression measures.
• Maximum values of outgoing harmonic currents per 1 kW contract power
Received
5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd Over 23rd
power voltage
6.6 kV 3.5 2.5 1.6 1.3 1.0 0.9 0.76 0.70
22 kV 1.8 1.3 0.82 0.69 0.53 0.47 0.39 0.36
33 kV 1.2 0.86 0.55 0.46 0.35 0.32 0.26 0.24

 Application of the specific consumer guidelines

Install, add or renew
equipment

Calculation of equivalent
capacity total
Equal to or less
than reference
capacity Equivalent
capacity total

Above reference
capacity
Calculation of outgoing
harmonic current

Not more than More than upper limit

harmonic current upper
limit?
Harmonic suppression
measures necessary
Equal to or less
than upper limit
Harmonic suppression
measures unnecessary

 Conversion factor
Classification Circuit type Conversion factor Ki
Without reactor K31 = 3.4
Three-phase bridge (capacitor With reactor (AC side) K32 = 1.8
3
smoothing) With reactor (DC side) K33 = 1.8
With reactors (AC, DC sides) K34 = 1.4
Single-phase bridge (capacitor Without reactor K43 = 2.9
4 smoothing, full-wave rectification) With reactor (AC side) K44 = 1.3
When a high power factor converter
5 Self-excitation three-phase bridge K5 = 0
is used

106 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.2 Power supply harmonics
 Equivalent capacity limit
Received power voltage Reference capacity 1
6.6 kV 50 kVA
22/33 kV 300 kVA
66 kV or more 2000 kVA
2
 Harmonic content (when the fundamental current is considered as 100%)
Reactor 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
Not used 65 41 8.5 7.7 4.3 3.1 2.6 1.8 3
Three-phase bridge Used (AC side) 38 14.5 7.4 3.4 3.2 1.9 1.7 1.3
(capacitor smoothing) Used (DC side) 30 13 8.4 5.0 4.7 3.2 3.0 2.2
Used (AC, DC sides) 28 9.1 7.2 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 1.4
Single-phase bridge Not used 60 33.5 6.1 6.4 2.6 2.7 1.5 1.5
4
(capacitor smoothing,
full-wave rectification) Used (AC side) 31.9 8.3 3.8 3.0 1.7 1.4 1.0 0.7

 Calculation of equivalent capacity P0 of harmonic generating equipment 5

"Equivalent capacity" is the capacity of a 6-pulse converter converted from the capacity of consumer's harmonic generating
equipment and is calculated by the following equation. If the sum of equivalent capacities is higher than the limit (refer to the
list of the equivalent capacity limits), harmonics must be calculated by the equation in next subheading. 6
P0 = Σ (Ki × Pi) [kVA]
Ki: Conversion factor (Refer to the list of the conversion
factors.) 7
Pi: Rated capacity of harmonic generating equipment*1 [kVA]
i: Number indicating the conversion circuit type
*1 Rated capacity: Determined by the capacity of the applied motor and found in the table "Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents of 8
inverter-driven motors". The rated capacity used here is used to calculate the generated harmonic amount and is different from the power supply
capacity required for actual inverter drive.

 Calculation of outgoing harmonic current

9
Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted from received power voltage) × operation ratio ×
harmonic content
• Operation ratio: actual load factor × operation time ratio during 30 minutes
• Harmonic content: Refer to the list of the harmonic content.
10
 Rated capacities and outgoing harmonic currents of inverter-driven motors
Fundamental Fundamenta Outgoing harmonic current converted from 6.6 kV (mA) (No reactor, 100%
wave current (A) l wave operation ratio)
Rated
Applicable current
capacity
motor (kW) converted
200 V 400 V (kVA) 5th 7th 11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th
from 6.6 kV
(mA)
0.4 1.61 0.81 49 0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882
0.75 2.74 1.37 83 0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494
1.5 5.50 2.75 167 1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006
2.2 7.93 3.96 240 2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320
3.7 13.0 6.50 394 4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092
5.5 19.1 9.55 579 6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42
7.5 25.6 12.8 776 9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97
11 36.9 18.5 1121 13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18
15 49.8 24.9 1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16
18.5 61.4 30.7 1860 21.8 1209 762.6 158.1 143.2 79.98 57.66 48.36 33.48
22 73.1 36.6 2220 25.9 1443 910.2 188.7 170.9 95.46 68.82 57.72 39.96

 Determining if a countermeasure is required

A countermeasure for harmonics is required if the following condition is satisfied: outgoing harmonic current > maximum value
per 1 kW contract power × contract power.

3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.2 Power supply harmonics
107
  Harmonic suppression techniques
No. Item Description
Reactor installation (FR- Install an AC reactor (FR-HAL) on the AC side of the inverter or a DC reactor (FR-HEL) on its DC side,
1
HAL, FR-HEL) or install both to suppress outgoing harmonic currents.

High power factor These converters trim the current waveform to be a sine waveform by switching the rectifier circuit
converter (FR-HC2), (converter module) with transistors. Doing so suppresses the generated harmonic amount significantly.
2 multifunction regeneration Connect it to the DC area of an inverter. Use the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) with the
accessories that come as standard. To use the FR-XC series converter, use the converter with an FR-
converter (FR-XC)*1 XCB box-type reactor and enable the harmonic suppression function.
Installation of power factor When used with a reactor connected in series, the power factor improving correction capacitor can
3
improving capacitor absorb harmonic currents.
Transformer multi-phase Use two transformers with a phase angle difference of 30° in combinations of to Δ and Δ to Δ, to
4
operation provide an effect corresponding to 12 pulses, reducing low-degree harmonic currents.
Passive filter A capacitor and a reactor are used together to reduce impedances at specific frequencies. Harmonic
5
(AC filter) currents are expected to be absorbed greatly by using this technique.
This filter detects the current in a circuit generating a harmonic current and generates a harmonic current
equivalent to a difference between that current and a fundamental wave current to suppress the
6 Active filter
harmonic current at the detection point. Harmonic currents are expected to be absorbed greatly by using
this technique.
*1 The safety communication model (FR-E800-SCE) is not intended for the use with the high power factor converter (FR-HC2) or multifunction
regeneration converter (FR-XC in common bus regeneration mode).

108 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.2 Power supply harmonics
3.3 Installation of a reactor 1

When the inverter is connected near a large-capacity power transformer (500 kVA or more) or when a power factor correction
capacitor is to be switched over, an excessive peak current may flow in the power input circuit, damaging the converter circuit. 2
To prevent this, always install an AC reactor (FR-HAL), which is available as an option.
• Three-phase power input
3

Power supply system capacity

1500
AC reactor Range requiring
MCCB MC (FR-HAL) Inverter
1000 installation of 4

(kVA)
R X the reactor
R/L1 U
Power S Y 500
S/L2 V M
supply
T Z
T/L3 W 0
5
Wiring length (m) 10

• Single-phase power input 6

AC reactor
(FR-HAL) Inverter
MCCB MC
R X
Power
supply S Y
R/L1 U 7
S/L2 V M
T Z
W
8

10

3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.3 Installation of a reactor
109
 3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)

 Inverter input side magnetic contactor (MC)

On the inverter input side, it is recommended to provide an MC for the following purposes. (Refer to page 25 for selection.)
• To disconnect the inverter from the power supply at activation of a protective function or at malfunctioning of the driving
system (emergency stop, etc.).
For example, an MC prevents overheat or burnout of the brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is insufficient or
brake regenerative transistor is damaged with short while connecting an optional brake resistor.
• To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at power restoration after an inverter stop made by a power failure.
• To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance and inspection work.
Use the inverter input current as a reference for selection of an MC to perform an emergency stop during operation, and
select the MC conforming to JEM 1038-AC-3 class rated operational current.

NOTE
• Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter circuit (switching life is about 1,000,000 times),
frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor must be avoided. Turn ON or OFF the start (STF/STR) signal for the
inverter start control to run or stop the inverter.

• Inverter start/stop circuit example

As shown in the following figure, always use the start signal (turn ON or OFF the STF/STR signal) to make a start or stop.
MCCB MC
R/L1 U
Power To the
S/L2 V
supply motor
T/L3 W

T ∗1
Inverter
Operation preparation
C
OFF ON MC
B
A
MC
RA
STF/STR
Start/Stop SD
RA
MC Start

Stop RA

*1 When the power supply is 400 V class, install a stepdown transformer.

 Handling of the magnetic contactor on the inverter's output side

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the
magnetic contactor is turned ON while the inverter is operating, overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate.

 Handling of the manual contactor on the inverter's output side

A PM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded inside. High-voltage is generated at the motor
terminals while the motor is running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. In an application where the PM motor is driven
by the load even after the inverter is powered OFF, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output
side.

110 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)
NOTE
• Before wiring or inspection for a PM motor, confirm that the PM motor is stopped. In an application, such as fan and blower, 1
where the motor is driven by the load, a low-voltage manual contactor must be connected at the inverter's output side, and
wiring and inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may get an electric shock.
• Do not open or close the contactor while the inverter is running (outputting).
2

10

3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.4 Power shutdown and magnetic contactor (MC)
111
 3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400
V class motor insulation
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals. Especially in a
400 V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation. When the 400 V class motor is driven by the inverter,
consider the following countermeasures:

 Countermeasures
It is recommended to take one of the following countermeasures:

 Rectifying the motor insulation and limiting the PWM carrier frequency according to the wiring
length
For the 400 V class motor, use an insulation-enhanced motor.
Specifically,
• Order a "400 V class inverter-driven insulation-enhanced motor".
• For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use an "inverter-driven dedicated
motor".
• Set Pr.72 PWM frequency selection as indicated below according to the wiring length.
Wiring length
Shorter than 50 m 50 to 100 m Longer than 100 m
Pr.72 PWM frequency selection 14.5 kHz or less 8 kHz or less 2 kHz or less

 Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side

• Connect the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) to the output side of the inverter.

NOTE
• For the details of the surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H), refer to the Instruction Manual of each option.

112 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.5 Countermeasures against deterioration of the 400 V class motor insulation
3.6 Checklist before starting operation 1

The FR-E800 series inverter is a highly reliable product, but incorrect peripheral circuit making or operation/handling method
may shorten the product life or damage the product. Before starting operation, always recheck the following points. 2
Refer to Check by
Checkpoint Countermeasure
page user

Crimp terminals are insulated.

Use crimp terminals with insulation sleeves to wire the power supply and the
—
3
motor.
The wiring between the power
supply (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/ Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the inverter will damage
L3) and the motor (terminals U, V, the inverter. Never perform such wiring.
51
4
W) is correct.
Wire offcuts can cause a fault, failure, or malfunction. Always keep the inverter
No wire offcuts are left from the
clean. When drilling mounting holes in an enclosure etc., take caution not to —
time of wiring.
allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter. 5
Use an appropriate cable gauge to suppress the voltage drop to 2% or less. If
The main circuit cable gauge is the wiring distance is long between the inverter and motor, a voltage drop in the
54
correctly selected. main circuit will cause the motor torque to decrease especially during the output
of a low frequency. 6
Keep the total wiring length within the specified length. In long distance wiring,
The total wiring length is within the charging currents due to stray capacitance in the wiring may degrade the fast-
54
specified length. response current limit operation or cause the equipment on the inverter's output
side to malfunction. Pay attention to the total wiring length. 7
The input/output (main circuit) of the inverter includes high frequency
Countermeasures are taken components, which may interfere with the communication devices (such as AM
102
against EMI. radios) used near the inverter. Connect radio noise filters or EMC filters on the
input side of the inverter to minimize interference. 8
On the inverter's output side, there
is no power factor correction Doing so will shut off the inverter output or damage the capacitor or surge
—
capacitor, surge suppressor, or suppressor. If any of the above devices is connected, immediately remove it.
radio noise filter installed. 9
When performing an inspection or For a short time after the power-OFF, a high voltage remains in the smoothing
rewiring on the product that has capacitor, and it is dangerous. Before performing an inspection or rewiring, wait
been energized, the operator has 10 minutes or longer after the power supply turns OFF, then confirm that the —
waited long enough after shutting
off the power supply.
voltage across the main circuit terminals P/+ and N/- of the inverter is low enough
using a digital multimeter, etc.
10
The 24 V external power supply
If "EV" is displayed on the operation panel when the FR-E8DS is installed, turn
has been turned OFF before —
OFF the 24 V external power supply before wiring and inspection.
wiring or inspection.
• A short circuit or ground fault on the inverter's output side may damage the
inverter module.
• Fully check the insulation resistance of the circuit prior to inverter operation
The inverter's output side has no since repeated short circuits caused by peripheral circuit inadequacy or an
short circuit or ground fault earth (ground) fault caused by wiring inadequacy or reduced motor insulation —
occurring. resistance may damage the inverter module.
• Fully check the to-earth (ground) insulation and phase-to-phase insulation of
the inverter's output side before power-ON. Especially for an old motor or use
in hostile atmosphere, securely check the motor insulation resistance, etc.
The circuit is not configured to use
Since repeated inrush currents at power ON will shorten the life of the converter
the inverter's input-side magnetic
circuit, frequent starts and stops of the magnetic contactor must be avoided. 110
contactor to start/stop the inverter
Turn ON or OFF the inverter's start (STF/STR) signal to run or stop the inverter.
frequently.
A mechanical brake is not
connected to terminals P/+ and To terminals P/+ and PR, connect only an external brake resistor. 89
PR.
The voltage applied to the inverter
Application of a voltage higher than the permissible voltage to the inverter I/O
I/O signal circuits is within the 60, 63
signal circuits or opposite polarity may damage the I/O devices.
specifications.

3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.6 Checklist before starting operation
113
 Refer to Check by
Checkpoint Countermeasure
page user
When using a switching circuit as shown below, chattering due to misconfigured
sequence or arc generated at switching may allow undesirable current to flow in
and damage the inverter. Miswiring may also damage the inverter. (Note that a
PM motor cannot be driven by the commercial power supply.)

MC1
When using the electronic bypass Interlock
operation, electrical and Power R/L1 U
mechanical interlocks are supply M —
S/L2 V MC2
provided between the electronic
T/L3 W
bypass contactors MC1 and MC2. Undesirable current
Inverter
If switching to the commercial power supply operation while a failure such as an
output short circuit has occurred between the magnetic contactor MC2 and the
motor, the damage may further spread. If a failure has occurred between the
MC2 and the motor, a protection circuit such as using the OH signal input must
be provided.
If the machine must not be restarted when power is restored after a power
A countermeasure is provided for failure, provide an MC on the inverter's input side and also make up a sequence
power restoration after a power which will not switch ON the start signal. If the start signal (start switch) remains —
failure. ON after a power failure, the inverter will automatically restart as soon as the
power is restored.
The encoder must be directly connected to a motor shaft without any backlash.
For Vector control, the encoder is
(Real sensorless vector control or PM sensorless vector control does not require
properly installed.
an encoder.)
On the inverter's input side, connect an MC for the following purposes:
• To disconnect the inverter from the power supply at activation of a protective
function or at malfunctioning of the driving system (emergency stop, etc.).
A magnetic contactor (MC) is • To prevent any accident due to an automatic restart at power restoration after
installed on the inverter's input an inverter stop made by a power failure. 110
side. • To separate the inverter from the power supply to ensure safe maintenance
and inspection work.
To use an MC to perform an emergency stop during operation, select the MC
conforming to JEM 1038-AC-3 rated current for the inverter rated input current.
The magnetic contactor on the
Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor only when both
inverter's output side is properly 110
the inverter and motor are at a stop.
handled.
A PM motor is a synchronous motor with high-performance magnets embedded
inside. High-voltage is generated at the motor terminals while the motor is
When using a PM motor, a low-
running even after the inverter power is turned OFF. In an application, such as
voltage manual contactor is
fan and blower, where the motor is driven by the load, a low-voltage manual 110
installed on the inverter's output
contactor must be connected on the inverter's output side, and wiring and
side.
inspection must be performed while the contactor is open. Otherwise you may
get an electric shock.
If electromagnetic noise generated from the inverter causes the frequency
setting signal to fluctuate and the motor rotation speed to be unstable when
changing the motor speed with analog signals, the following countermeasures
are effective:
An EMI countermeasure is
• Do not run the signal cables and power cables (inverter I/O cables) in parallel
provided for the frequency setting 102
with each other and do not bundle them.
signals.
• Run the signal cables as far away as possible from the power cables (inverter
I/O cables).
• Use shielded cables.
• Install a data line filter to signal cable (example: ZCAT3035-1330 by TDK).
When performing frequent starts/stops by the inverter, rise/fall in the
temperature of the transistor element of the inverter will repeat due to a repeated
flow of large current, shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal
fatigue is related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by reducing
A countermeasure is provided for
current at locked condition, starting current, etc. Reducing current may extend —
an overload operation.
the service life but may also cause torque shortage, which leads to a start failure.
Adding a margin to the current can eliminate such a condition. For an induction
motor, use an inverter of a higher capacity (up to two ranks). For a PM motor,
use an inverter and PM motor of higher capacities.
The specifications and rating
Make sure that the specifications and rating match the system requirements. 120
match the system requirements.

114 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.6 Checklist before starting operation
 Refer to Check by
Checkpoint Countermeasure
page user
When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is generated on the motor
1
shaft, which may cause electrical corrosion of the bearing in rare cases
depending on the wiring, load, operating conditions of the motor or specific
Countermeasures are taken inverter settings (high carrier frequency). Contact your sales representative to
against electrical corrosion on the
motor bearing.
take appropriate countermeasures for the motor. The following shows examples — 2
of countermeasures for the inverter.
• Decrease the carrier frequency.
• Provide a common mode choke*1 on the output side of the inverter.
*1 Recommended common mode choke: FT-3KM F series FINEMET® common mode choke cores manufactured by Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
3
FINEMET is a registered trademark of Hitachi Metals, Ltd.

10

3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.6 Checklist before starting operation
115
 3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
When a fault is detected by the protective function, the protective function activates and outputs the Fault signal. However, the
Fault signal may not be output at an inverter's fault occurrence when the detection circuit or output circuit fails, etc. Although
Mitsubishi assures the best quality products, provide an interlock which uses inverter status output signals to prevent accidents
such as damage to the machine when the inverter fails for some reason. Also at the same time consider the system
configuration where a failsafe from outside the inverter, without using the inverter, is enabled even if the inverter fails.

 Interlock method which uses the inverter status output signals

By combining the inverter output signals to provide an interlock as shown below, an inverter failure can be detected. (For details
of each signal, refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
No. Interlock method Check method Used signals
Inverter protective function Operation check of an alarm contact.
a Fault (ALM) signal
operation Circuit error detection by negative logic.
b Inverter operating status Operation ready signal check. Inverter operation ready (RY) signal
Start (STF or STR) signal
c Inverter running status Logic check of the start signal and running signal.
Inverter running (RUN) signal
Start (STF or STR) signal
d Inverter running status*1 Logic check of the start signal and output current.
Output current detection (Y12) signal
*1 This interlock method cannot be used when a PM motor is used.
• When using various signals, assign the functions to Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) referring to
the following table.

Output Pr.190 to Pr.196 settings

signal Positive logic Negative logic
ALM 99 199
RY 11 111
RUN 0 100
Y12 12 112

NOTE
• Changing the terminal assignment using Pr.190 to Pr.196 (Output terminal function selection) may affect the other
functions. Set parameters after confirming the function of each terminal.

 Checking by using the Fault signal output from the inverter... (a)
When the inverter's protective function is activated and the inverter output is stopped, the Fault (ALM) signal is output. (The
ALM signal is assigned to terminals A, B, and C in the initial setting). With this signal, check that the inverter operates properly.
In addition, negative logic can be set. (ON when the inverter is normal, OFF when the fault occurs.)
Output frequency

Inverter fault occurrence

(trip)

Time
ALM ON OFF
(when output
at NC contact)
ON OFF
RES
Reset processing
(about 1 s)
Reset ON

 Checking the inverter operating status by using the Inverter operation ready signal output
from the inverter ... (b)
The Inverter operation ready (RY) signal is output when the inverter power is ON and the inverter becomes operative. Check
if the RY signal is output after powering ON the inverter.

116 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
 Checking the inverter operating status by using the start signal input to the inverter and the
Inverter running signal output from the inverter ... (c)
The Inverter running (RUN2) signal is output when the inverter is running. Check if the RUN2 signal is output while a start signal
1
(the STF/STR signal for forward/reverse rotation command) is input to the inverter. Even after the start signal is turned OFF,
the RUN2 signal is kept output until the inverter makes the motor to decelerate and to stop. For the logic check, configure a
sequence considering the inverter's deceleration time.
2
Power ON OFF
supply
STF
ON OFF 3
ON
RH

4
Output frequency

DC injection brake
operation point
DC injection
brake operation
Pr. 13 Starting
frequency
5
Reset
Time
processing

RY
ON OFF 6
RUN2 ON OFF

 Checking the motor operating status by using the start signal input to the inverter and the
Output current detection signal output from the inverter ... (d)
7
This interlock method cannot be used when a PM motor is used.
The Output current detection (Y12) signal is output when the inverter operates and currents flows into the motor.
Check if the Y12 signal is output while a start signal (the STF/STR signal for forward/reverse rotation command) is input to the
8
inverter. The Y12 signal is initially set to be output at 150% inverter rated current. Adjust the level to around 20% using no load
current of the motor as reference with Pr.150 Output current detection level.
Like the Inverter running (RUN) signal, even after the start signal is turned OFF, the Y12 signal is kept output until the inverter
9
stops the output to a decelerating motor. For the logic check, configure a sequence considering the inverter's deceleration time.

 Backup method which does not use the inverter 10

Even if the interlock is provided by the inverter status signal, enough failsafe is not ensured depending on the failure status of
the inverter itself. For example, if an inverter CPU fails in a system interlocked with the inverter's Fault, start, and RUN signals,
no Fault signals will be output and the RUN signal will be kept ON because the inverter CPU is down.
Provide a speed detector to detect the motor speed and current detector to detect the motor current, and consider the backup
system such as performing a check as follows according to the level of importance of the system.

 Start signal and actual operation check

Check the motor running and motor current while the start signal is input to the inverter by comparing the start signal to the
inverter and detected speed of the speed detector or detected current of the current detector. Note that the current is flowing
through the motor while the motor coasts to stop, even after the inverter's start signal is turned OFF. For the logic check,
configure a sequence considering the inverter's deceleration time. In addition, it is recommended to check the three-phase
current when using the current detector.

3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
117
  Command speed and actual operation check
Check for a gap between the actual speed and commanded speed by comparing the inverter's speed command and the speed
detected by the speed detector.

Controller

System failure

Inverter Sensor
(speed, temperature,
air volume, etc.)

To the alarm detection sensor

118 3. Precautions for Use of the Inverter

3.7 Failsafe system which uses the inverter
 CHAPTER 4
CHAPTER 4 Specifications
4

4.1 Inverter rating........................................................................................................................................................120

4.2 Motor rating...........................................................................................................................................................123
6
4.3 Common specifications.........................................................................................................................................134
4.4 Outline dimension drawings..................................................................................................................................136
7

10

119
 4 Specifications
This chapter explains the specifications of this product.
Always read the instructions before use.

4.1 Inverter rating

 Three-phase 200 V power supply

0008 0015 0030 0050 0080 0110 0175 0240 0330 0470 0600 0760 0900
Model FR-E820-[]
0.1K 0.2K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K
Applicable LD 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.1 2.2 3.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0
motor
capacity ND (initial setting) 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0
(kW)*1
Rated LD 0.5 0.8 1.4 2.4 3.8 4.8 7.8 12.0 15.9 22.3 27.5 35.1 45.8
capacity
ND (initial setting) 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.0 3.2 4.4 7.0 9.6 13.1 18.7 23.9 30.3 35.9
(kVA)*2
1.3 2.0 3.5 6.0 9.6 12.0 19.6 30.0 40.0 56.0 69.0 88.0 115.0
Rated LD
(1.1) (1.7) (3.0) (5.1) (8.2) (10.2) (16.7) (25.5) (34.0) (47.6) (58.7) (74.8) (97.8)
current
0.8 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 17.5 24.0 33.0 47.0 60.0 76.0 90.0
(A)*7 ND (initial setting)
(0.8) (1.4) (2.5) (4.1) (7.0) (10.0) (16.5) (23.0) (31.0) (44.0) (57.0) (72.0) (86.0)
Output

Overload LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

current
ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
rating*3
Voltage*4 Three-phase 200 to 240 V
Regenera Brake transistor Not used Built-in
tive Maximum brake torque (ND
braking reference)*5 150% 100% 50% 20%

Rated input AC (DC) voltage/frequency Three-phase 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz (283 to 339 VDC*9)
Permissible AC (DC) voltage
fluctuation 170 to 264 V, 50/60 Hz (240 to 373 VDC*9)
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
Power supply

Rated Without DC LD 1.9 3.0 5.1 8.2 12.5 16.1 25.5 37.1 48.6 74.3 90.5 112.9 139.5
input reactor ND 1.4 2.3 4.5 7.0 10.7 15.0 23.1 30.5 41.0 63.6 79.9 99.0 114.3
current LD 1.3 2.0 3.5 6.0 9.6 12.0 20.0 30.0 40.0 56.0 69.0 88.0 115.0
(A)*8 With DC reactor
ND 0.8 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.0 11.0 17.5 24.0 33.0 47.0 60.0 76.0 90.0
Power Without DC LD 0.7 1.1 1.9 3.1 4.8 6.2 9.7 15.0 19.0 29.0 35.0 43.0 54.0
supply reactor ND 0.5 0.9 1.7 2.7 4.1 5.7 8.8 12.0 16.0 25.0 31.0 38.0 44.0
capacity LD 0.5 0.8 1.3 2.3 3.7 4.6 7.5 11.0 15.0 21.0 26.0 34.0 44.0
(kVA)*6 With DC reactor ND 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2 6.7 9.1 13.0 18.0 23.0 29.0 34.0
Protective structure (IEC 60529) Open type (IP20)
Cooling system Natural Forced air
Approx. mass (kg) 0.5 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.4 1.4 1.8 3.3 3.3 5.4 5.6 11.0 11.0

*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
To drive a Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor, use the 0.75K inverter for a 1.1 kW motor, or 2.2K inverter for a 3 kW motor.
*2 The rated output capacity is the value with respect to 230 V output voltage.
*3 The percentage of the overload current rating is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*4 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.

The maximum point of the voltage waveform at the output side of the inverter is approximately the power supply voltage multiplied by √2 .
*5 The amount of braking torque is the average short-term torque (which varies depending on motor loss) that is generated when a motor
decelerates in the shortest time by itself from 60 Hz. It is not continuous regenerative torque. The average deceleration torque becomes lower
when a motor decelerates from a frequency higher than the base frequency. The inverter is not equipped with a built-in brake resistor. Use an
option brake resistor for an operation with large regenerative power (not available for the FR-E820-0008(0.1K) and FR-E820-0015(0.2K)). The
brake unit (FR-BU2) can be also used.
*6 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the input power impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*7 The value in parentheses is the rated output current when the low acoustic noise operation is performed with the surrounding air temperature
exceeding 40°C while 2 kHz or higher value is selected in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
*8 The rated input current is the value at a rated output voltage. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect
the value.

120 4. Specifications
4.1 Inverter rating
 *9 · Connect the DC power supply to the inverter terminals P/+ and N/-. Connect the positive terminal of the power supply to terminal P/+ and the
negative terminal to terminal N/-.
· When the energy is regenerated from the motor, the voltage between terminals P/+ and N/- may temporarily rise to 415 V or more. Use a DC 1
power supply resistant to the regenerative voltage/energy. When a power supply that cannot resist the regenerative voltage/energy is used,
connect a reverse current prevention diode in series.
· Powering ON produces up to four times as large current as the inverter rated current. Prepare a DC power supply resistant to the inrush current
at power ON, although an inrush current limit circuit is provided in the FR-E800 series inverter.
· The power capacity depends on the output impedance of the power supply. Select a power capacity around the AC power supply capacity.
2
 Three-phase 400 V power supply
Model FR-E840-[]
0016 0026 0040 0060 0095 0120 0170 0230 0300 0380 0440 3
0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K
Applicable LD 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 30.0
motor
capacity
(kW)*1
ND (initial setting) 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0
4
Rated LD 1.6 2.7 4.2 5.3 8.5 13.3 17.5 26.7 31.2 34.3 45.7
capacity
ND (initial setting) 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.6 7.2 9.1 13.0 17.5 22.9 29.0 33.5
(kVA)*2

Rated LD
2.1
(1.8)
3.5
(3.0)
5.5
(4.7)
6.9
(5.9)
11.1
(9.4)
17.5 23.0 35.0 41.0 45.0
(14.9) (19.6) (29.8) (34.9) (38.3) (51.0)
60.0 5
current
1.6 2.6 4.0 6.0 9.5
(A)*7 ND (initial setting) 12.0 17.0 23.0 30.0 38.0 44.0
(1.4) (2.2) (3.8) (5.4) (8.7)
Output

Overload LD 120% 60 s, 150% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C

current
ND (initial setting) 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at surrounding air temperature of 50°C
6
rating*3
Voltage*4 Three-phase 380 to 480 V
Regenera Brake transistor Built-in
tive Maximum brake torque (ND
braking reference)*5 100% 50% 20%
7
Rated input AC (DC) voltage/frequency Three-phase 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz (537 to 679 VDC*9)
Permissible AC (DC) voltage
323 to 528 V, 50/60 Hz (457 to 740 VDC*9)
fluctuation
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
8
Power supply

Rated Without DC LD 3.3 6.0 8.9 10.7 16.2 24.9 32.4 46.7 54.2 59.1 75.6
input reactor ND 2.7 4.4 6.7 9.5 14.1 17.8 24.7 32.1 41.0 50.8 57.3
current
(A)*8 With DC reactor
LD
ND
2.1
1.6
3.5
2.6
5.5
4.0
6.9
6.0
11.0
9.5
18.0
12.0
23.0
17.0
35.0
23.0
41.0
30.0
45.0
38.0
60.0
44.0
9
Power Without DC LD 2.5 4.5 6.8 8.2 12.4 19.0 25.0 36.0 42.0 45.0 58.0
supply reactor ND 2.1 3.4 5.1 7.2 10.8 14.0 19.0 25.0 32.0 39.0 44.0
capacity With DC reactor LD 1.6 2.7 4.2 5.3 8.5 13.0 18.0 27.0 31.0 34.0 46.0
(kVA)*8 ND 1.2 2.0 3.0 4.6 7.2 9.1 13.0 18.0 23.0 29.0 34.0 10
Protective structure (IEC 60529) Open type (IP20)
Cooling system Natural Forced air
Approx. mass (kg) 1.2 1.2 1.4 1.8 1.8 2.4 2.4 4.8 4.9 11.0 11.0

*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
To drive a Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy-saving motor, use the 2.2K inverter for a 3 kW motor.
*2 The rated output capacity is the value with respect to 440 V output voltage.
*3 The percentage of the overload current rating is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.
*4 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.

The maximum point of the voltage waveform at the output side of the inverter is approximately the power supply voltage multiplied by √2 .
*5 The amount of braking torque is the average short-term torque (which varies depending on motor loss) that is generated when a motor
decelerates in the shortest time by itself from 60 Hz. It is not continuous regenerative torque. The average deceleration torque becomes lower
when a motor decelerates from a frequency higher than the base frequency. The inverter is not equipped with a built-in brake resistor. Use an
option brake resistor for an operation with large regenerative power. The brake unit (FR-BU2) can be also used.
*6 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the input power impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*7 The value in parentheses is the rated output current when the low acoustic noise operation is performed with the surrounding air temperature
exceeding 40°C while 2 kHz or higher value is selected in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
*8 The rated input current is the value at a rated output voltage. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect
the value.
*9 · Connect the DC power supply to the inverter terminals P/+ and N/-. Connect the positive terminal of the power supply to terminal P/+ and the
negative terminal to terminal N/-.
· When the energy is regenerated from the motor, the voltage between terminals P/+ and N/- may temporarily rise to 830 V or more. Use a DC
power supply resistant to the regenerative voltage/energy. When a power supply that cannot resist the regenerative voltage/energy is used,
connect a reverse current prevention diode in series.
· Powering ON produces up to four times as large current as the inverter rated current. Prepare a DC power supply resistant to the inrush current
at power ON, although an inrush current limit circuit is provided in the FR-E800 series inverter.
· The power capacity depends on the output impedance of the power supply. Select a power capacity around the AC power supply capacity.

4. Specifications
4.1 Inverter rating
121
  Single-phase 200 V power supply
0008 0015 0030 0050 0080 0110
Model FR-E820S-[]
0.1K 0.2K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K
Applicable
motor
capacity ND 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.5 2.2
(kW)*1
Rated
capacity ND 0.3 0.6 1.2 2.0 3.2 4.4
(kVA)*2
Rated
current 0.8 1.5 3.0 5.0 8.0 11.0
ND
(0.8) (1.4) (2.5) (4.1) (7.0) (10.0)
(A)*7
Output

Overload
current 150% 60 s, 200% 3 s (inverse-time characteristics) at
ND
surrounding air temperature of 50°C
rating*3
Voltage*4 Three-phase 200 to 240 V
Regenera Brake transistor Not used Built-in
tive *5
braking Maximum brake torque 150% 100% 50% 20%
Rated input AC voltage/frequency Single-phase 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Permissible AC voltage fluctuation 170 to 264 V, 50/60 Hz
Permissible frequency fluctuation ±5%
Without DC
Power supply

Rated 2.3 4.1 7.9 11.2 17.9 25.0

input reactor
current With DC ND
*8 1.4 2.6 5.2 8.7 13.9 19.1
(A) reactor
Power Without DC
0.5 0.9 1.7 2.5 3.9 5.5
supply reactor
capacity ND
*6 With DC reactor 0.3 0.6 1.1 1.9 3.0 4.2
(kVA)
Protective structure (IEC 60529) Open type (IP20)
Cooling system Natural Forced air
Approx. mass (kg) 0.5 0.5 0.8 1.3 1.4 1.9

*1 The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
*2 The rated output capacity is the value with respect to 230 V output voltage.
*3 The percentage of the overload current rating is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow
time for the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. For single-phase power input model, the bus voltage
decreases to power failure detection level and the load of 100% or higher may not be available if the automatic restart after instantaneous power
failure function (Pr.57) or the power failure stop function (Pr.261) is set and power supply voltage is low while the load increases.
*4 The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range.

The maximum point of the voltage waveform at the output side of the inverter is approximately the power supply voltage multiplied by √2 .
*5 The amount of braking torque is the average short-term torque (which varies depending on motor loss) that is generated when a motor
decelerates in the shortest time by itself from 60 Hz. It is not continuous regenerative torque. The average deceleration torque becomes lower
when a motor decelerates from a frequency higher than the base frequency. The inverter is not equipped with a built-in brake resistor. Use an
option brake resistor for an operation with large regenerative power (not available for the FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) and FR-E820S-0015(0.2K)). The
brake unit (FR-BU2) can be also used.
*6 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the input power impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*7 The value in parentheses is the rated output current when the low acoustic noise operation is performed with the surrounding air temperature
exceeding 40°C while 2 kHz or higher value is selected in Pr.72 PWM frequency selection.
*8 The rated input current is the value at a rated output voltage. The input power impedances (including those of the input reactor and cables) affect
the value.

122 4. Specifications
4.1 Inverter rating
4.2 Motor rating 1

4.2.1 Mitsubishi Electric high-performance energy- 2

saving motor with encoder SF-PR-SC
3
 Motor specifications (SF-PR-SC)
 200 V class
SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR-
SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- 4
Motor model SC-11K- SC-15K- SC-18K- SC-22K- SC-30K-
SC-1K-4P SC-2K-4P SC-3K-4P SC-5K-4P SC-7K-4P
4P 4P 4P 4P 4P

Applicable inverter model (ND FR-E820-

FR-E820- FR-E820- FR-E820- FR-E820- FR-E820- FR-E820- FR-E820- FR-E820- FR-E820-
rating)*1 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K
22K (LD
rating)
5
Applicable inverter rated current
8.00 11.00 17.50 24.00 33.00 47.00 60.00 76.00 90.00 115.00
(A) (ND rating)*2
Rated output power (kW)
Number of motor poles
1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5
4
11 15 18.5 22 30
6
Rated motor current (A) 6.00 8.80 14.40 20.80 28.00 40.00 54.00 66.00 78.00 105.00
Rated torque (N·m) 7.96 11.67 19.63 29.18 39.79 58.36 79.58 98.15 116.72 159.17
Maximum torque at 150% 60 s
(N·m)
11.94 17.51 29.45 43.77 59.69 87.54 119.38 147.23 175.08 191.00 7
Rated frequency (Hz) 60
Maximum permissible
100
frequency (Hz)
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 180L 8
-4 2 64 90 170 330 410 850 1100 1700 1900 2310
Inertia moment J (×10 kg·m )
Noise 75 dB or less
Surrounding air temperature
and humidity
-10°C to +40°C (non-freezing), 100% RH or less (non-condensing) 9
Protective structure IP44 (dustproof/waterproof type: IP55)
Cooling system Totally-enclosed fan-cooled type (IC411)
Detector
Insulation class 120(E) 120(E)
NOC-HP2048-2MHT, 2048 pulses, complementary, +12/24 VDC power supply*3
120(E) 130(B) 130(B) 130(B) 130(B) 130(B) 130(B) 155(F)
10
Vibration rank V15 V10 V15
Approx. mass (kg) 28 36 47 65 75 120 135 160 170 190
Special specifications Flange type (frame numbers up to 160), anti-corrosive coating (type 3), NTC thermistor, IP55, and others

4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
123
  400 V class
SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR- SF-PR-
Motor model SC-1K- SC-2K- SC-3K- SC-5K- SC-7K- SC-11K- SC-15K- SC-18K- SC-22K- SC-30K-
4PH 4PH 4PH 4PH 4PH 4PH 4PH 4PH 4PH 4PH

Applicable inverter model (ND FR-E840-

FR-E840- FR-E840- FR-E840- FR-E840- FR-E840- FR-E840- FR-E840- FR-E840- FR-E840-
22K (LD
rating)*1 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K 18.5K 22K
rating)
Applicable inverter rated current
4.00 6.00 9.50 12.00 17.00 23.00 30.00 38.00 44.00 60.00
(A) (ND rating)*2
Rated output power (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30
Number of motor poles 4
Rated motor current (A) 3.00 4.40 7.20 10.40 14.00 20.00 27.00 33.00 39.00 52.50
Rated torque (N·m) 7.96 11.67 19.63 29.18 39.79 58.36 79.58 98.15 116.72 159.17
Maximum torque at 150% 60 s
11.94 17.51 29.45 43.77 59.69 87.54 119.38 147.23 175.08 191.00
(N·m)
Rated frequency (Hz) 60 (1800 r/min)
Maximum permissible
100 (3000 r/min)
frequency (Hz)
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M 180M 180L
Inertia moment J (×10-4 kg·m2) 64 90 170 330 410 850 1100 1700 1900 2310
Noise 75 dB or less
Surrounding air temperature
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 100% RH or less (non-condensing)
and humidity
Protective structure IP44 (dustproof/waterproof type: IP55)
Cooling system Totally-enclosed fan-cooled type (IC411)
Detector NOC-HP2048-2MHT, 2048 pulses, complementary, +12/24 VDC power supply*3
Insulation class 120(E) 120(E) 120(E) 130(B) 130(B) 130(B) 130(B) 130(B) 130(B) 155(F)
Vibration rank V15 V10 V15
Approx. mass (kg) 28 36 47 65 75 120 135 160 170 190
Special specifications Flange type (frame numbers up to 160), anti-corrosive coating (type 3), NTC thermistor, IP55, and others

*1 The model and the rated current of the inverter are applicable when a 4-pole motor is used.
*2 The value shown is applicable to the motor at high carrier frequency (Pr.72 = "6" and Pr.240 = "0").
*3 A separate power supply (12 to 24 V) is required for the encoder.

 Motor torque (SF-PR-SC)

The torque characteristics of the motor driven by the inverter are shown in graph form as follows.
The motor is driven by the inverter at ND rating. The overload capacity decreases for the LD rating. Observe the specified range
of the inverter.
SF-PR-SC
1.5 to 2.2 (kW) 3.7 to 22 (kW)

Maximum torque for short time Maximum torque for short time
150 150

Continuous Continuous
operation torque operation torque
100 100
Output Output
torque 70 torque 80
(%) (%)
57 57

0 1800 3000 0 1800 3000

Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)

124 4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
4.2.2 Mitsubishi Electric Vector control dedicated motor 1
SF-V5RU
 Motor specifications (SF-V5RU) 2
 200 V class
Motor model: SF-V5RU[]K
Applicable inverter model:
1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18
3
2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
FR-E820-[]K (ND rating)
Rated output power (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
Rated current (A)
Rated torque (N·m)
8.5
9.55
11.5
14.1
17.6
23.6
28.5
35.0
37.5
47.7
54
70.0
72.8
95.5
88
118
4
Maximum torque at 150% 60 s
14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176
(N·m)
Rated speed (r/min)
Maximum speed (r/min)
1500
3000*1
5
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M
Inertia moment J (×10-4 kg·m2) 67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725

Noise*5 75 dB or less 6
Single-phase 200 V 50 Hz / Three-phase 200 V 50 Hz /
Cooling fan Voltage
Single-phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Three-phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz
(with
thermal 36/55 W 22/28 W 55/71 W
Input*2
protector)*6*
7 Recommended
(0.26/0.32 A) (0.11/0.13 A) (0.37/0.39 A)
7
0.36 A 0.18 A 0.51 A
thermal setting
Surrounding air temperature and
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Structure (Protection rating) Totally enclosed forced ventilated (Motor: IP44, Cooling fan: IP23S)*3
8
Detector Encoder: 2048 pulses/rev, Phases A, B, and Z output, +12/24 VDC power supply*5
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Insulation class F 9
Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138

 400 V class 10
Motor model: SF-V5RUH[]K 1 2 3 5 7 11 15 18
Applicable inverter model:
2.2 2.2 3.7 7.5 11 15 18.5 22
FR-E840-[]K (ND rating)
Rated output power (kW) 1.5 2.2 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
Rated current (A) 4.2 5.8 8.8 14.5 18.5 27.5 35.5 44
Rated torque (N·m) 9.55 14.1 23.6 35.0 47.7 70.5 95.5 118
Maximum torque at 150% 60 s
14.3 21.1 35.4 52.4 71.6 105 143 176
(N·m)
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000*1
Frame No. 90L 100L 112M 132S 132M 160M 160L 180M
-4 2 67.5 105 175 275 400 750 875 1725
Inertia moment J (×10 kg·m )
*5 75 dB or less
Noise
Single-phase 200 V 50 Hz / Three-phase 380 to 400 V 50 Hz /
Cooling fan Voltage
Single-phase 200 to 230 V 60 Hz Three-phase 400 to 460 V 60 Hz
(with
thermal 36/55 W 22/28 W 55/71 W
Input*2 (0.26/0.32 A) (0.11/0.13 A) (0.19/0.19 A)
protector)*6*
7 Recommended
0.36 A 0.18 A 0.25 A
thermal setting
Surrounding air temperature and
-10 to +40°C (non-freezing), 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Structure (Protection rating) Totally enclosed forced ventilated (Motor: IP44, Cooling fan: IP23S)*3
Detector Encoder: 2048 pulses/rev, Phases A, B, and Z output, +12/24 VDC power supply*5
Equipment Encoder, thermal protector, fan
Insulation class F
Vibration rank V10
Approx. mass (kg) 24 33 41 52 62 99 113 138

*1 The maximum speed of a 3.7 kW motor or less is 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office for use of these motor.

4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
125
 *2 Power (current) at 50/60 Hz.
*3 Since a brake motor has a window for gap check, the protection rating of both the cooling fan section and brake section of the motor is IP20. The
letter S in IP23S is an additional code indicating that a cooling fan was checked for water protection while it is stationary.
*4 The value shown is applicable to the motor at high carrier frequency (Pr.72 = 6 and Pr.240 = 0).
*5 The 12/24 V power supply is required for the encoder.
*6 The cooling fan is equipped with a thermal protector. The cooling fan stops when the coil temperature equals or exceeds the specified value in
order to protect the fan motor. A restrained cooling fan or degraded fan motor insulation could be causes for the rise in coil temperature. The
cooling fan re-starts when the coil temperature drops to normal.
*7 The cooling fan voltage and input values are the basic specifications of the cooling fan alone and free air values. The input value becomes slightly
larger when it is rotated by this motor due to an increased workload, but the cooling fan can be used as it is. When preparing a thermal relay at
the user side, use the recommended thermal setting.

 Motor torque (SF-V5RU)

The torque characteristics of the SF-V5RU series driven by the inverter are shown in graph form as follows.
These are the case of the motor driven by the inverter at ND rating. The overload capacity decreases for the LD rating. Observe
the specified range of the inverter.
SF-V5RU (1500 r/min series)
1.5 to 18.5 (kW)

Maximum torque for short time

150
Output torque

Continuous
operation torque
100 Constant power
75
(%) 50

0 1500 3000
Speed (r/min)

• The maximum speed of a 3.7 kW motor or less is 3600 r/min. Consult our sales office for use of these motor.
• The maximum speed of a brake motor is 1800 r/min.

126 4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
4.2.3 PM motor MM-GKR 1
 Motor specifications
00*.5 2
A B C D E F
• A: Rated output power 3
Symbol Rated output
power (kW)
1 0.1*1 4
2 0.2
4 0.4
7 0.75 5
*1 Electromagnetic brake equipped model is not applicable.
• B: Rated speed
Symbol Rated speed (r/min) 6
3 3000

• C: Electromagnetic brake
7
Symbol Electromagnetic
brake
None Without
B With 8
• D: Oil seal
Symbol Oil seal 9
None Without
J With*1*2

*1 The reduction gear equipped models do not have the oil seal. 10
*2 The oil seal model has an outline dimension different from the standard motor.
For details, contact your sales representative.
• E: Reduction gear
Symbol Reduction gear*1*2
None Without
G0 For general industrial machine (flange
mounting)

*1 The reduction gear equipped models do not have the oil seal.
*2 Electromagnetic brake equipped model is not applicable.
• F: Shaft end
Symbol Shaft end
None Standard (straight shaft)
K Key shaft (with key)*1
D D-cut shaft*1*2

*1 For the applicable models and detailed specifications, refer to the sensorless servo catalog.
*2 Electromagnetic brake equipped model is not applicable.

4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
127
  Motor specifications (standard)
Motor model MM-GKR13 MM-GKR23 MM-GKR43 MM-GKR73
Applicable inverter model*10 FR-E820(S)-0.1K FR-E820(S)-0.2K FR-E820(S)-0.4K FR-E820(S)-0.75K
Power supply capacity (kVA)*2 0.3 0.5 0.9 1.3
Rated output power
Continuous 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75
(kW)
characteristics
*3 0.32 0.64 1.3 2.4
Rated torque (N·m)
Maximum torque (N·m) 0.64 1.3 2.5 4.84
Rated speed (r/min) 3000
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000
Instantaneous permissible speed (r/ 3450
min)
Power rate at continuous constant-
15.0 21.7 43.7 46.0
torque (kW/s)
Number of poles 10
Rated current (A) 0.65 1.08 1.94 3.34
Maximum current (A) 1.3 2.2 3.9 6.7
Inertia moment (×10-4 kg·m2) 0.0676 0.187 0.371 1.24
Recommended load inertia moment 10 times max.
ratio*4
Speed/position detector None
Oil seal Not provided (The oil seal model is also available (MM-GKR_J).)
Insulation class B: 130°C
Structure Totally enclosed self-cooling
Protective structure IP65*5
Surrounding air Operation: 0°C to +40°C (non-freezing)
temperature Storage: -15°C to +70°C (non-freezing)
Operation: 10% to 80% RH or less (non-condensing)
Ambient humidity
Storage: 10% to 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Environment*7 Indoors (no direct sun light) and free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust
Atmosphere
and dirt, etc.
Altitude Maximum 1000 m
Vibration *6
X: 49 m/s2, Y: 49 m/s2
Vibration rank V10*8
L (mm) 25 30 30 40
Permissible load
Radial (N) 88 245 245 392
on the shaft*9
Thrust (N) 59 98 98 147
Mass (kg) 0.40 0.77 1.3 2.7

*1 The above characteristics apply when the rated AC voltage is input from the inverter (refer to page 127). The rated output power or speed is not
guaranteed at low supply voltages.
*2 The power supply capacity varies with the value of the input power impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).
*3 To drive a machine that produces unbalanced torque, such as a lift axis, the unbalanced torque is recommended to be equal to or less than the
70% of the rated torque.
*4 This is the ratio of the moment of load inertia to the moment of motor inertia under position control. If the load inertia moment ratio exceeds the
described value, contact your sales representative.
*5 Except for the shaft hole. For the reduction gear equipped model, the protective structure is equivalent to IP44.
Shaft hole

*6 For the vibration direction, X indicates the direction of the motor output axis and Y indicates the direction perpendicular to the motor output axis.
The numbers are values at points where the maximum values are indicated (normally the bracket at the non-load side).
Bearings are subjected to fretting while the motor is stopped. Suppress the vibration to about the half of the permissible value.
Motor

X Y

*7 The standard motor may not be used under the condition where it is constantly exposed to oil mist, oil, or water. For details, contact your sales
representative.
*8 "V10" means that the vibration amplitude of the single motor is 10 μm or lower. The following figure shows the installation orientation of the motor
and measurement position at the vibration degree measurement.
Motor
Top Measurement
position
Bottom

128 4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
 *9 For the permissible load on the shaft, refer to the following figure. On the shaft, do not apply a load exceeding the value in the table. Each value
in the table shows the permissible value for the single load application.
L
Radial load
1
L: Distance from the flange
mounting surface to the
Thrust load
center of the load
*10 By setting Pr.80, a motor with one rank lower capacity than the inverter capacity can be used. To use such a motor, set Pr.80 Motor capacity
before performing PM parameter initialization. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
2
 Electromagnetic brake motor specifications
Motor model MM-GKR23B MM-GKR43B MM-GKR73B 3
Applicable inverter model*3 FR-E820(S)-0.2K FR-E820(S)-0.4K FR-E820(S)-0.75K
Rated output power
Continuous 0.2 0.4 0.75
(kW)
characteristics
Rated torque (N·m) 0.64 1.3 2.4 4
Maximum torque (N·m) 1.3 2.5 4.8
Rated speed (r/min) 3000
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000
Instantaneous permissible speed (r/ 3450 5
min)
Power rate at continuous constant-
19.4 41.3 42.2
torque (kW/s)
Rated current (A)
Maximum current (A)
1.08
2.2
1.94
3.9
3.34
6.7
6
Inertia moment (×10-4 kg·m2) 0.209 0.393 1.35
Speed/position detector None
Insulation class B: 130°C 7
Structure Totally enclosed self-cooling
Protective structure IP65*1
Surrounding air
temperature
Operation: 0°C to +40°C (non-freezing)
Storage: -15°C to +70°C (non-freezing)
8
Operation: 10% to 80% RH or less (non-condensing)
Ambient humidity
Environment Storage: 10% to 90% RH or less (non-condensing)
Atmosphere Indoors (no direct sunlight) 9
Altitude Maximum 1000 m
Vibration*2 X: 49 m/s2, Y: 49 m/s2

Permissible load
L (mm)
Radial (N)
30
245
30
245
40
392
10
on the shaft
Thrust (N) 98 98 147
Mass (kg) 1.2 1.7 3.7

*1 Except for the shaft hole.

*2 For the vibration direction, X indicates the direction of the motor output axis and Y indicates the direction perpendicular to the motor output axis.
The numbers are values at points where the maximum values are indicated (normally the bracket at the non-load side).
Bearings are subjected to fretting while the motor is stopped. Suppress the vibration to about the half of the permissible value.
Motor

X Y

*3 By setting Pr.80, a motor with one rank lower capacity than the inverter capacity can be used. To use such a motor, set Pr.80 Motor capacity
before performing PM parameter initialization. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)

 Electromagnetic brake specifications

Electromagnetic brake is intended for emergency use to prevent drop of or keep hold of the workpiece at power failure or fault
occurrence during vertical movement. Do not use it for regular braking.
Motor model MM-GKR23B MM-GKR43B MM-GKR73B
Type*1 Power off (spring-set) safety brake

Rated voltage*2 24 VDC -100 %

Power consumption (W) at 20°C 7.9 10
Static friction torque (N·m) 1.3 2.4

Permissible per operation (J) 22 64

braking work per hour (J) 220 640
Count of operation
(times)
20000
*3
Life expectancy
Reference braking
work (J)
22 64

4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
129
 *1 The manual release is not available. Apply 24 VDC power to release the electromagnetic brake electrically.
*2 Separate power source for the electromagnetic brake.
*3 The brake gap cannot be adjusted though it widens as the brake lining wears with each braking. The life expectancy of brake therefore refers to
a period of time during which the brake can be used without adjustment.

 Reduction gear equipped model specifications Reduction gear equipped model for general
industrial machines: G0
Outp Permissible load on the
Permissible load inertia
ut Actual shaft*5
Reduction Inertia moment moment ratio*2 Mass
Model pow reduction Permissible Permissible
ratio J (×10-4 kg·m2)*1 (calculation at motor (kg)
er ratio radial load thrust load
shaft)
(kW) (N) (N)
1/5 42/221 0.0720 150 200
1/12 9/104 0.0706 1.3 240 320
MM-GKR13G0 0.1
1/20 12/247 0.0703 370 450
1/30 24/713 0.0768 2.4 500 500
1/5 44/217 0.222 330 350
1/12 48/589 0.204 710 720
MM-GKR23G0 0.2 2.8
1/20 32/651 0.201 780 780
1/30 24/713 0.200 10 times or lower of the 780 780
1/5 15/77 0.406 moment of motor inertia 330 350
3.2
1/12 9/110 0.390 710 720
MM-GKR43G0 0.4
1/20 9/189 0.399 760 780
4.3
1/30 12/351 0.398 760 780
1/5 19/95 1.37 430 430
5.5
1/12 40/475 1.32 620 620
MM-GKR73G0 0.75
1/20 14/285 1.29 970 960
7.3
1/30 25/722 1.28 970 980

Item Specification
Installation method Flange mounting
Installation orientation Any orientation
Lubrication method Grease (already filled)
Rotation direction of output axis Same as that of the motor output axis
Backlash*4 60 minutes or less at the output shaft of the reduction gear
Maximum torque Twice of the rated torque (For the rated torque, refer to page 127.)
Permissible speed (motor axis) 3000 r/min (Instantaneous permissible speed: 3450 r/min)
IP rating Equivalent to IP44
Vibration resistance X: 29.4 m/s2, Y: 29.4 m/s2
Reduction gear efficiency*3 80% or higher

*1 This value is a value at the shaft of the motor with a reduction gear.
*2 If the value exceeds the described value, contact your sales representative.
*3 The reduction gear efficiency differs depending on the reduction ratio. Additionally, the reduction gear efficiency varies depending on operating
conditions, such as the output torque, rotation speed, and temperature.
The value in the table is a typical value for the rated torque at the rated speed and at a room temperature, but not a guaranteed value.
*4 The following conversion formula is used for the unit conversion of the backlash: 1 minute = 0.0167°
*5 The permissible radial load is the value at the center of the output shaft of the reduction gear. On the shaft, do not apply a load exceeding the
value in the table. Each value in the table shows the permissible value for the single load application.
Q/2
Q: Shaft length
Q

130 4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
 Motor torque characteristic
MM-GKR13 MM-GKR23 to 73 1
Torque Torque
200%
Short time operation range(3s)
200%
Short time operation range(3s) 2
100% 100%
90% Continuous
operation range
Continuous
operation range 3
0% 0%
750r/min 3000r/min 3000r/min
Motor rotation speed Motor rotation speed 4
• When the input voltage is low, the torque may be reduced.
• The continuous operation torque becomes 80% at 6 r/min or lower.
• When driving the motor under high load in low-speed range (especially at 6 r/min or lower), the protective function by 5
electronic thermal O/L relay (E.THT or E.THM) may be activated and the short time operation range torque may not be
generated.
6
4.2.4 PM motor EM-A
 Motor specifications 7
(0$0) N: UPLQ 9
8
A B C D
• A: Electromagnetic brake
Symbol Electromagnetic 9
brake
None Without
B With
10
• B: Shaft end
Symbol Shaft end
None Standard
K Key shaft

• C: Protective structure
Symbol Protective
structure
None IP44
W IP65

• D: Output power
Symbol Description
5.5, 7.5 Rated capacity
(kW)

4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
131
  Specifications of the dedicated PM motor (EM-A motor)
 Motor specifications (standard)
Motor model EM-AMF5.5kW EM-AMF7.5kW
Applicable inverter model*7 FR-E820-5.5K FR-E820-7.5K
Rated speed (r/min) 3000
Maximum speed (r/min) 4000
Number of poles 6
Rated current (A) 22 31
Rated torque (N·m)*1*8 17.50 23.88
Maximum torque (%) 200%
Insulation class 155(F)
Recommended load inertia
10 times max.
moment ratio
Structure Totally enclosed self-cooling
Protective structure IP44*2, IP65*2*3
Surrounding
0°C to +40°C (non-freezing), 90% RH
air temperature
or less (non-condensing)
and humidity
Environment*5 Altitude Maximum 1000 m
4.9 m/s2 or less (momentarily
Vibration*4
tolerable up to 9.8 m/s2)
Permissible L (mm) 41.5
load on the Radial (N) 1470
shaft*6 Thrust (N) 980
Without brake 28 34
Mass (kg)
With brake 34 40

*1 The above characteristics apply when the rated AC voltage is input from the inverter (refer to page 131). The rated output power or speed is not
guaranteed at low supply voltages.
*2 Except for the shaft hole.
Shaft hole

*3 Applicable for EM-AMF[][]W motors.

*4 For the vibration direction, X indicates the direction of the motor output axis and Y indicates the direction perpendicular to the motor output axis.
The numbers are values at points where the maximum values are indicated (normally the bracket at the non-load side). Bearings are subjected
to fretting while the motor is stopped. Suppress the vibration to about the half of the permissible value.
Motor

X Y

*5 The standard motor may not be used under the condition where it is constantly exposed to oil mist, oil, or water. For details, contact your sales
representative.
*6 For the permissible load on the shaft, refer to the following figure. On the shaft, do not apply a load exceeding the value in the table.
Each value in the table shows the permissible value for the single load application.
L
Radial load
L: Distance from the flange
mounting surface to the
Thrust load
center of the load
*7 By setting Pr.80, a motor with one rank lower capacity than the inverter capacity can be used. To use such a motor, set Pr.80 Motor capacity
before performing PM parameter initialization. (Refer to the FR-E800 Instruction Manual (Function).)
*8 To drive a machine that produces unbalanced torque, such as a lift axis, the unbalanced torque is recommended to be equal to or less than the
90% of the rated torque.

132 4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
 Motor torque
1
Torque

200%
Short time operation range(3s)
2
150%
Continuous operation range
100%
75%
3

0 3000 4000 4
Motor rotation speed(r/min)

• When the input voltage is low, the torque may be reduced.

• The continuous operation torque is 90% at 10 r/min or less (for 1.5 kW or higher EM-A motor).
5
• When driving the EM-A motor under high load in the low-speed range (especially at 15 r/min or lower for 0.75 kW or lower,
or at 10 r/min or lower for 1.5 kW or higher), the protective function of the electronic thermal O/L relay (E.THT or E.THM)
may be activated and short time operation range torque may not be generated.
6

10

4. Specifications
4.2 Motor rating
133
 4.3 Common specifications

Control method Soft-PWM control / High carrier frequency PWM control

Induction Selectable among V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real sensorless vector control,
motor and Vector control*1
PM motor PM sensorless vector control
Output Induction 0.2 to 590 Hz (The upper-limit frequency is 400 Hz under Advanced magnetic flux vector control, Real
frequency motor sensorless vector control, and Vector control*1.)
range PM motor 0.2 to 400 Hz (not operable at a frequency higher than the maximum motor frequency)
Frequency 0.015 Hz /60 Hz at 0 to 10 V / 12 bits (terminals 2 and 4)
Analog input
setting and 0.03 Hz /60 Hz at 0 to 5 V / 11 bits or 0 to 20 mA / 11 bits (terminals 2 and 4)
resolution Digital input 0.01 Hz
Frequency Analog input Within ±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (25°C ±10°C)
accuracy Digital input 0.01% or less of the set output frequency
Control

Voltage/frequency Base frequency can be set from 0 to 590 Hz. Constant-torque/variable-torque pattern can be selected
characteristics (with induction motor only).
Induction Advanced magnetic flux vector control: 150% at 0.5 Hz, Real sensorless vector control and Vector
Starting
motor control*1: 200% at 0.3 Hz (0.1K to 3.7K), 150% at 0.3 Hz (5.5K or higher)
torque
PM motor 50%
Torque boost Manual torque boost (induction motor only)
Acceleration/deceleration 0 to 3600 s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/
time setting deceleration modes are available.
Induction
DC injection Operation frequency (0 to 120 Hz), operation time (0 to 10 s), operation voltage (0% to 30%) variable
motor
brake
PM motor Operation time (0 to 10 s) variable. Operating voltage (operating current) fixed.
Stall prevention operation
Operation current: 0% to 220% variable, with selectable availability of the function
level

Torque limit level Torque limit value can be set (0 to 400% variable). (Real sensorless vector control, Vector control*1,
PM sensorless vector control)
Analog input Terminals 2 and 4: 0 to 10 V / 0 to 5 V / 4 to 20 mA (0 to 20 mA)
Frequency
Input using the operation panel.
setting
signal Digital input Input of four-digit BCD (binary-coded decimal) or 16-bit binary (when the option FR-A8AX E kit is
installed).
Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input (3-wire input) can be
Start signal
selected.
Low-speed operation command, Middle-speed operation command, High-speed operation command,
Input signal (standard model:
Output stop, Forward rotation command, Reverse rotation command, Inverter reset
7, Ethernet model: 2)
The signal to be input can be changed using Pr.178 to Pr.184 (Input terminal function selection).
Maximum and minimum frequency settings, multi-speed operation, acceleration/deceleration pattern,
thermal protection, DC injection brake, starting frequency, JOG operation, output stop (MRS), stall
prevention, regeneration avoidance, increased magnetic excitation deceleration, frequency jump,
rotation display, automatic restart after instantaneous power failure, remote setting, automatic
Operation

acceleration/deceleration, retry function, carrier frequency selection, fast-response current limit,

forward/reverse rotation prevention, operation mode selection, slip compensation, droop control,
Operational function speed smoothing control, traverse, auto tuning, applied motor selection, RS-485 communication*2,
Ethernet communication*4, PID control, easy dancer control, cooling fan operation selection, stop
selection (deceleration stop/coasting), power failure time deceleration-to-stop function, stop-on-
contact control, PLC function, life diagnosis, maintenance timer, current average monitor, multiple
rating, orientation control*1, speed control, torque control, pre-excitation, torque limit, position control,
test operation, safety stop function, emergency drive*3
Open collector output Inverter running, Up to frequency, Fault
(standard model: 2) The signal to be output can be changed using Pr.190 to Pr.192 (Output terminal function
Output signal

Relay output (1) selection).

Pulse train output
1440 pulses/s at full scale, 2400 pulses/s at maximum.
(FM type inverter)
Analog output
-10 to +10 V / 12 bits
(AM type inverter)

134 4. Specifications
4.3 Common specifications
 Overcurrent trip during acceleration, Overcurrent trip during constant speed, Overcurrent trip during
deceleration or stop, Regenerative overvoltage trip during acceleration, Regenerative overvoltage trip
during constant speed, Regenerative overvoltage trip during deceleration or stop, Inverter overload 1
trip (electronic thermal relay function), Motor overload trip (electronic thermal relay function), Heat
sink overheat, Undervoltage, Input phase loss*5, Stall prevention stop, Loss of synchronism
detection*6, Upper limit fault detection, Lower limit fault detection, Brake transistor alarm detection,
Output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent, Output short circuit, Output phase loss, External thermal 2
Fault
relay operation, PTC thermistor operation*6, Option fault, Communication option fault, Internal storage
device fault, Parameter storage device fault, PU disconnection, Retry count excess, CPU fault,

Protective
Abnormal output current detection, Inrush current limit circuit fault, USB communication fault, Analog
input fault, Safety circuit fault, Overspeed occurrence*6, Speed deviation excess detection*1*6, Signal
3
function
loss detection*1*6, Excessive position fault*1*6, Brake sequence fault*6, Acceleration error*6, PID
signal fault, Ethernet communication fault, Opposite rotation deceleration fault*6, Internal circuit fault,
User definition error by the PLC function, Board combination fault 4
Fan alarm, stall prevention (overcurrent), stall prevention (overvoltage), regenerative brake pre-
alarm*6, electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm, PU stop, maintenance timer alarm, parameter
Alarm, write error, operation panel lock*6, Password locked*6, speed limit indication*6, stroke limit warning*6,
Warning, Error
message home position return setting error*6, home position return uncompleted*6, safety stop, load fault 5
warning, emergency drive in operation*3*6, Ethernet communication fault*4, duplicate IP address*4, IP
address fault*4, incorrect parameter setting, Corrosion level warning
Surrounding air temperature -20°C to +60°C (The rated current must be reduced at a temperature above 50°C.) 6
95% RH or less (non-condensing) (With circuit board coating (conforming to IEC 60721-3-3:1994
Environment

Surrounding air humidity 3C2))

90% RH or less (non-condensing) (Without circuit board coating)
Storage temperature*7 -40°C to +70°C 7
Ambience Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt)
Altitude/vibration Maximum 3000 m*8, 5.9 m/s2 or less at 10 to 55 Hz in X, Y, and Z directions
*1 Available when a Vector control compatible option (FR-A8AP E kit) is installed. 8
*2 Available only for the standard model.
*3 Available for the standard model and the Ethernet model.
*4 Available for the Ethernet model and the safety communication model.
*5
*6
Available for the three-phase power input model.
Not activated in the inverter in the initial state.
9
*7 Applicable to conditions for a short time, for example, in transit.
*8 For the installation at an altitude above 1000 m, consider a 3% reduction in the rated current per 500 m increase in altitude.

10

4. Specifications
4.3 Common specifications
135
 4.4 Outline dimension drawings
The standard model has a setting dial on the operation panel.
The Ethernet model and the safety communication model have UP and DOWN keys on the operation panel.

4.4.1 Inverter outline dimension drawings (Standard

model)
FR-E820-0008(0.1K), FR-E820-0015(0.2K), FR-E820-0030(0.4K), FR-E820-0050(0.75K)
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K), FR-E820S-0015(0.2K), FR-E820S-0030(0.4K)
φ
C

H1
H

W1 D1
W D

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0008(0.1K)
80.5 10
FR-E820-0015(0.2K)
FR-E820-0030(0.4K) 112.5
42
FR-E820-0050(0.75K) 68 56 128 118 132.5 5
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K)
80.5 10
FR-E820S-0015(0.2K)
FR-E820S-0030(0.4K) 142.5 42

(Unit: mm)

136 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-E820-0080(1.5K), FR-E820-0110(2.2K)
FR-E840-0016(0.4K), FR-E840-0026(0.75K), FR-E840-0040(1.5K) 1
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K), FR-E820S-0080(1.5K)
φC

H1

H
5

7
W1 D1
W
D
8

10

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0080(1.5K)
135.5 46
FR-E820-0110(2.2K)
FR-E840-0016(0.4K)
129.5 40
FR-E840-0026(0.75K) 108 96 128 118 5
FR-E840-0040(1.5K) 135.0 46
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K) 135 45.5
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K) 161 46
(Unit: mm)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
137
 FR-E820-0175(3.7K)
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K)
φC

H1

W1 D1

W D

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0175(3.7K)
140 128 128 118 142.5 52.5 5
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K)
(Unit: mm)

138 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-E840-0060(2.2K), FR-E840-0095(3.7K)
φC
1

H1

H
5

6
W1 D1

W
D 7

10

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E840-0060(2.2K)
140 128 150 138 135 43.5 5
FR-E840-0095(3.7K)
(Unit: mm)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
139
 FR-E820-0240(5.5K), FR-E820-0330(7.5K)
φC

H1

W1 D1

W D

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0240(5.5K)
180 164 260 244 165 71.5 6
FR-E820-0330(7.5K)
(Unit: mm)

140 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-E840-0120(5.5K), FR-E840-0170(7.5K)
φC
1

（６）
2

H1

H
5

6
５ 10

D1
６ W1 （６）
D
7
W

10

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E840-0120(5.5K)
220 208 150 138 147 68 5
FR-E840-0170(7.5K)
(Unit: mm)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
141
 FR-E820-0470(11K), FR-E820-0600(15K)
FR-E840-0230(11K), FR-E840-0300(15K)
2×φC

(8)
H1
(2) H
8
6 10.6
12.5 W1 (12.5) D1
W D

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0470(11K)
FR-E820-0600(15K)
220 195 260 244 190 84.7 6
FR-E840-0230(11K)
FR-E840-0300(15K)
(Unit: mm)

142 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-E820-0760(18.5K), FR-E820-0900(22K)
FR-E840-0380(18.5K), FR-E840-0440(22K) 1
2×φC

(10)
2

H1
H
5

7
10

10 2.3
(1.5)

10 W1 (10) D1
W D

10

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0760(18.5K)
FR-E820-0900(22K)
220 200 350 330 190 84.7 10
FR-E840-0380(18.5K)
FR-E840-0440(22K)
(Unit: mm)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
143
 4.4.2 Inverter outline dimension drawings (Ethernet
model / Safety communication model)
FR-E820-0008(0.1K)E, FR-E820-0015(0.2K)E, FR-E820-0030(0.4K)E, FR-E820-0050(0.75K)E
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K)E, FR-E820S-0015(0.2K)SCE, FR-E820S-0030(0.4K)SCE
FR-E820-0008(0.1K)SCE, FR-E820-0015(0.2K)SCE, FR-E820-0030(0.4K)SCE, FR-E820-0050(0.75K)SCE
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K)SCE, FR-E820S-0015(0.2K)SCE, FR-E820S-0030(0.4K)SCE

C
φ

H1
H

W1 D1
W D

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0008(0.1K)E
FR-E820-0015(0.2K)E
80.5 10
FR-E820-0008(0.1K)SCE
FR-E820-0015(0.2K)SCE
FR-E820-0030(0.4K)E
112.5
FR-E820-0030(0.4K)SCE
42
FR-E820-0050(0.75K)E
68 56 128 118 132.5 5
FR-E820-0050(0.75K)SCE
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K)E
FR-E820S-0015(0.2K)E
80.5 10
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K)SCE
FR-E820S-0015(0.2K)SCE
FR-E820S-0030(0.4K)E
142.5 42
FR-E820S-0030(0.4K)SCE

(Unit: mm)

144 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-E820-0080(1.5K)E, FR-E820-0110(2.2K)E
FR-E840-0016(0.4K)E, FR-E840-0026(0.75K)E, FR-E840-0040(1.5K)E 1
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K)E, FR-E820S-0080(1.5K)E
FR-E820-0080(1.5K)SCE, FR-E820-0110(2.2K)SCE
FR-E840-0016(0.4K)SCE, FR-E840-0026(0.75K)SCE, FR-E840-0040(1.5K)SCE 2
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K)SCE, FR-E820S-0080(1.5K)SCE
φC

5
H1

W1 D1 8
W D

10

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0080(1.5K)E
FR-E820-0110(2.2K)E
135.5 46
FR-E820-0080(1.5K)SCE
FR-E820-0110(2.2K)SCE
FR-E840-0016(0.4K)E
FR-E840-0026(0.75K)E
129.5 40
FR-E840-0016(0.4K)SCE
FR-E840-0026(0.75K)SCE 108 96 128 118 5
FR-E840-0040(1.5K)E
135.0 46
FR-E840-0040(1.5K)SCE
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K)E
135 45.5
FR-E820S-0050(0.75K)SCE
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K)E
161 46
FR-E820S-0080(1.5K)SCE
(Unit: mm)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
145
 FR-E820-0175(3.7K)E
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K)E
FR-E820-0175(3.7K)SCE
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K)SCE
φC

H1

W1 D1

W D

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0175(3.7K)E
FR-E820-0175(3.7K)SCE
140 128 128 118 142.5 52.5 5
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K)E
FR-E820S-0110(2.2K)SCE
(Unit: mm)

146 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-E840-0060(2.2K)E, FR-E840-0095(3.7K)SCE
FR-E840-0060(2.2K)SCE, FR-E840-0095(3.7K)SCE 1
φC

H1

H
5

W1 D1 7
D
W

10

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E840-0060(2.2K)E
FR-E840-0095(3.7K)E
140 128 150 138 135 43.5 5
FR-E840-0060(2.2K)SCE
FR-E840-0095(3.7K)SCE
(Unit: mm)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
147
 FR-E820-0240(5.5K)E, FR-E820-0330(7.5K)E
FR-E820-0240(5.5K)SCE, FR-E820-0330(7.5K)SCE
φC

H1

W1 D1

W D

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0240(5.5K)E
FR-E820-0330(7.5K)E
180 164 260 244 165 71.5 6
FR-E820-0240(5.5K)SCE
FR-E820-0330(7.5K)SCE
(Unit: mm)

148 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-E840-0120(5.5K)E, FR-E840-0170(7.5K)E
FR-E840-0120(5.5K)SCE, FR-E840-0170(7.5K)SCE 1
φC

（６）
2

H1

H
5

6
５ 10

D1 7
６ W1 （６）
D
W
8

10

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E840-0120(5.5K)E
FR-E840-0170(7.5K)E
220 208 150 138 147 68 5
FR-E840-0120(5.5K)SCE
FR-E840-0170(7.5K)SCE
(Unit: mm)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
149
 FR-E820-0470(11K)E, FR-E820-0600(15K)E
FR-E840-0230(11K)E, FR-E840-0300(15K)E
FR-E820-0470(11K)SCE, FR-E820-0600(15K)SCE
FR-E840-0230(11K)SCE, FR-E840-0300(15K)SCE
2×φC

(8)
H1
(2) H
8

6 10.6
12.5 W1 (12.5) D1
W D

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0470(11K)E
FR-E820-0600(15K)E
FR-E840-0230(11K)E
FR-E840-0300(15K)E
220 195 260 244 190 84.7 6
FR-E820-0470(11K)SCE
FR-E820-0600(15K)SCE
FR-E840-0230(11K)SCE
FR-E840-0300(15K)SCE
(Unit: mm)

150 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
FR-E820-0760(18.5K)E, FR-E820-0900(22K)E
FR-E840-0380(18.5K)E, FR-E840-0440(22K)E 1
FR-E820-0760(18.5K)SCE, FR-E820-0900(22K)SCE
FR-E840-0380(18.5K)SCE, FR-E840-0440(22K)SCE
2

(10)
3

H1
H
5

7
10

10 2.3
(1.5)

10 W1 (10) D1
W D 8

10

Inverter model W W1 H H1 D D1 C
FR-E820-0760(18.5K)E
FR-E820-0900(22K)E
FR-E840-0380(18.5K)E
FR-E840-0440(22K)E
220 200 350 330 190 84.7 10
FR-E820-0760(18.5K)SCE
FR-E820-0900(22K)SCE
FR-E840-0380(18.5K)SCE
FR-E840-0440(22K)SCE
(Unit: mm)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
151
 4.4.3 Dedicated motor outline dimension drawings
 Dedicated motor (SF-PR-SC) outline dimension drawings (standard
horizontal type)
Frame number: 90L
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
L

A Ｒ
KL
KA B Q
D
QK

H
W
KP

C
φ27

G
X
U
T

E E
F F XB

Z
S M
N Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above

Frame number: 100L, 112M

Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
L
A R KL
KA B 60 D

45

Ａ
KP
H

Ａ φ27
KG

C
G

W
45 J X
F F XB E
U

E
T

N M
Z

ML

Section AA Frame leg viewed

from above

Frame number: 132S, 132M

Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
L

A R KL
KA B 80 D

63

A
KP
H
KG

A φ27
C
G

W
X
45 40
U
T

F F XB E E
Z

N S M
ML Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above
Frame number: 160M, 160L
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
L
KL
A R
D
KA B 110
90

A
I
H
KG

A W φ56
G

X
U
T

50
Z

F F XB
E E
N
S M
Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above

152 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

Frame
No.
Output (kW)
4 6
A B C D E F G H I KA KG
KL
Motor

L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W
1
poles poles (KP)
90L 1.5 — 230.5 143 90 184 70 62.5 4 191 — 53 76 158 435.5 175 — 150 92.5 50 40 205 24j6 7 4 8
100L 2.2 1.5 267 173 100 207 80 70 6.5 203.5 230 65 88 169 507 300 212 180 110 60 45 240 28j6 7 4 8
3.7 — 256 181 112 228 95 70 6.5 226 253 69 103 180 506 230 242 180 120 60 45 250 28j6 7 4 8
112M

132S
—
5.5
2.2
3.7
293 181
270 211.5 132
112 228
266
95
108
70
70
6.5
6.5
226
265
253
288
106
75
103
120
180
197
543
575
230
256
242
268
180
180
120
155
60
80
45
63
250 28j6
305 38k6
7
8
4
5
8
10
2
132M 7.5 5.5 289 230.5 132 266 108 70 6.5 265 288 94 120 197 613 256 268 218 155 80 63 324 38k6 8 5 10
160M 11 7.5 309 252 160 318 127 105 8 316 367 105 142 266 707 310 — 254 183 110 90 398 42k6 8 5 12
160L 15 11 331 274 160 318 127 127 8 316 367 127 142 266 751 310 — 298 183 110 90 420 42k6 8 5 12

180M
18.5,
22
15 333.5 292.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8 359 410 127 168 289 773.5 335 — 285 209.5 110 90 440 48k6 9 5.5 14 3
18.5,
180LD — 394.5 311.5 180 406 139.5 139.5 11 381 — 184 429 480 853.5 341 — 323 209.5 110 90 459 55m6 10 6 16
22

NOTE 4
• The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height is 0
−0.5 .

 Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (standard 5

horizontal type)
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M
6
Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P
L
R
L
R
7
A B 50 KL
A B Q
KA 40 D KL
KA QK
Exhaust
Exhaust D

8
Suction
Suction

A A
KP

I
H
C

A
KG

KG
A

6.5
C
4

9
φ27
Direction of φ27
Direction of
cooling fan wind F F XB E E cooling fan wind 40
F F XB
Mark for earthing N M Mark for earthing E E
(grounding) N
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) (grounding) M
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) W ML Sliding distance
W Sliding distance
15 4
10
U

U
T

T
9

12
S
Frame leg viewed from above S
Frame leg viewed
Section AA
Section AA from above

For cooling fan (A, B)

For motor (U, V, W)
Thermal protector (G1, G2)

A B U V W G1 G2

Make sure to earth (ground) the earth (ground) terminal of the flange
Earthing (grounding) terminal (M4)
section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

Motor Terminal screw size
Frame
SF-V5RU[]K Mass (kg) KL A, B,
No. A B C D E F H I KA KG L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W U, V, W G1, G2
(KP) (C)
220
1 90L 24 256.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 198 — 53 65 425 175 — 150 56 — — 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
(210)
2 100L 33 284 128 100 207 80 70 203.5 230 65 78 231 477 200 212 180 63 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
3 112M 41 278 135 112 228 95 70 226 253 69 93 242 478 230 242 180 70 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5 132S 52 303 152 132 266 108 70 265 288 75 117 256 542 256 268 180 89 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7 132M 62 322 171 132 266 108 89 265 288 94 117 256 580 256 268 218 89 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
153
 Frame number: 160M, 160L, 180M

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P
L
R
KL
A B 110
D
KA 90
Exhaust
Suction

With guard A
wires

I
H
C
A
KG
φ56

8
Direction of
cooling fan wind 50
Mark for earthing XB E E
(grounding) F F
M
N
Earth (ground)
terminal (M8)
Sliding distance
W 4
U
T

14.5

S
Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above

For motor (U, V, W)

Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M8)
Make sure to earth (ground) the earth (ground) terminal of the flange
section as well as the earth terminal in the terminal box.

For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

Motor Terminal screw size
SF- Frame
Mass (kg) KL A, B,
V5RU[]K No. A B C D E F H I KA KG L M ML N XB Q QK R S T U W U, V, W G1, G2
(KP) (C)
11 160M 99 412 198 160 318 127 105 316 367 105 115 330 735 310 — 254 108 — — 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 160L 113 434 220 160 318 127 127 316 367 127 115 330 779 310 — 298 108 — — 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18 180M 138 438.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 359 410 127 139 352 790 335 — 285 121 — — 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4

NOTE
• Install the motor with a frame number 180 or larger on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.
• Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side.
0
• The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height is -0.5 .
• The 400 V class motor has "H" in its model name.

154 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
 Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (standard
horizontal type with brake) 1
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P Terminal box for cooling fan
2
L L
A R A R KL
KL D
KA B KA B Q

φ22
50 D *1

φ22
3
Exhaust Main QK
Exhaust Main 40 Suction terminal box
Suction terminal box
*1
*1 1 A *2

KP
A

KP

H
KG

C
A φ27

G
*2

C
KG
A

G
*2 φ27 Direction of J
cooling fan wind
Direction of F F XB E E
Mark for earthing Mark for earthing
cooling fan wind (grounding) F F XB 2 E E N M
(grounding)
N M ML
Earth (ground)
Earth (ground) terminal (M5) W
Sliding distance
5
terminal (M5)
W Sliding distance

U
X
X
U

T
T

Z
Z

S
S Frame leg viewed
from above Section AA Frame leg viewed
Section AA from above

6
Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan
For brake (B1, B2)
For motor (U, V, W) * indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual
For thermal protector (G1, G2)
For cooling fan (A, B)
opening.
Make sure to earth (ground) the earth (ground) terminal of the frame
7
B1 B2 U V W G1 G2 A B C
installation feet as well as the earth (ground) terminal in the terminal
box.

8
Earthing (grounding) Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M4) terminal (M4)

9
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)
SF- Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
Frame

10
V5RU Mass (kg) U, V, A, B, G1, B1,
No. A B C D E F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R S T U W
[]KB W (C) G2 B2
1 90L 29 296.5 114 90 183.6 70 62.5 4 — — — 53 27 65 220 245 465 175 — 150 15 56 9 50 40 168.5 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
2 100L 46 333.5 128 100 207 80 70 6.5 — — 40 65 27 78 231 265 526.5 200 212 180 4 63 12 60 45 193 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
3 112M 53 355 135 112 228 95 70 6.5 — — 40 69 27 93 242 290 555 230 242 180 4 70 12 60 45 200 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4 M4
5 132S 70 416 152 132 266 108 70 6.5 — — 40 75 27 117 256 329 655 256 268 180 4 89 12 80 63 239 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4
7 132M 80 435 171 132 266 108 89 6.5 — — 40 94 27 117 256 329 693 256 268 218 4 89 12 80 63 258 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4 M4

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
155
 Frame number: 160M, 160L, 180M

Terminal box for cooling fan

Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P
L
A R
KL
KA B 110
Main D
90
Suction Exhaust terminal box *1

φ22
*1, 2 A *2

KP
H
φ56

C
KG
A

G
Direction of Mark for earthing J
cooling fan wind (grounding) F F XB E E
Earth (ground) N M
terminal (M8)
W Sliding distance
U

X
T

S
Frame leg viewed
Section AA
from above

Main terminal box Terminal box for cooling fan

For motor (U, V, W)
* indicates an inserting position of a bolt with hex head holes for manual
For cooling fan (A, B, C)
opening.
Earthing
(grounding) A B C
Make sure to earth (ground) the earth (ground) terminal of the frame
U V W
terminal (M8)
Earthing (grounding)
installation feet as well as the earth (ground) terminal in the terminal
B1 B2 G1 G2
terminal (M4) box.

For brake (B1, B2) For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

SF- Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
Frame
V5RU Mass (kg) U, V, A, B, G1, B1,
No. A B C D E F G H I J KA KD KG KL KP L M ML N X XB Z Q QK R S T U W
[]KB W (C) G2 B2
11 160M 140 522.5 198 160 318 127 105 8 — — 50 105 56 115 330 391 845.5 310 — 254 4 108 14.5 110 90 323 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
15 160L 155 544.5 220 160 318 127 127 8 — — 50 127 56 115 330 391 889.5 310 — 298 4 108 14.5 110 90 345 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4 M4
18 180M 185 568.5 225.5 180 363 139.5 120.5 8 — — 50 127 56 139 352 428 920 335 — 285 4 121 14.5 110 90 351.5 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4 M4

NOTE
• Install the motor on the floor and use it with the shaft horizontal.
• Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side.
• The vertical tolerance for the shaft center height is -0.5
0
.
• The 400 V class motor has "H" in its model name.
• Since a brake power device is a stand-alone, install it inside the enclosure. (This device should be arranged by the customer.
Refer to the FR-E800 catalog.)

156 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
 Dedicated motor (SF-V5RU(H)) outline dimension drawings (flange type)
Frame number: 90L Frame number: 100L, 112M, 132S, 132M 1
Connector (for encoder) Connector (for encoder)
MS3102A20-29P MS3102A20-29P

2
LL LL
KB LR
Q KL KB LR
LG LE Q
Exhaust QK LN LZ
LG LE KL
QK LN LZ
Section Exhaust
AA Section
Suction AA
LA

3
B A Suction
LA

IE
LC
LB
D

B B A

LC
LB
D
A
KD B
Direction of
cooling fan wind
W KD A
Earth (ground) terminal (M5)
4
U

Direction of
Mark for earthing (grounding)
T

cooling fan wind W

U
S Earth (ground) terminal (M5)

T
Section BB Mark for earthing (grounding)
S

Section BB
5
For cooling fan (A, B) Make sure to earth (ground) the earth (ground) terminal of the flange
6
For motor (U, V, W)
For thermal protector (G1, G2) section as well as the earth (ground) terminal in the terminal box.

A B U V W G1 G2

Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M4)
7

8
Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

SF-
V5RUF[]K
Flange No.
Frame
No.
Mass (kg)
D IE KB KD KL LA
Motor

LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK
Shaft end

S T U W
Terminal screw size

U, V, W
A, B,
G1, G2
9
(C)
1 FF165 90L 26.5 183.6 — 198.5 27 220 165 130j6 200 3.5 12 402 4 12 50 50 40 24j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
2 FF215 100L 37 207 130 213 27 231 215 180j6 250 4 16 432 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4

10
3 FF215 112M 46 228 141 239 27 242 215 180j6 250 4 16 448 4 14.5 60 60 45 28j6 7 4 8 M6 M4 M4
5 FF265 132S 65 266 156 256 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 484 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4
7 FF265 132M 70 266 156 294 27 256 265 230j6 300 4 20 522 4 14.5 80 80 63 38k6 8 5 10 M6 M4 M4

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
157
 Frame number: 160M, 160L, 180M

Connector (for encoder)

MS3102A20-29P
LL
KB LR

Q
LG LE LN LZ
QK KL
Exhaust Section
AA
Suction

IE
LA
A
B

LC
LB
D

B
KD A

Direction of
Earth (ground) terminal (M8) W
cooling fan wind
Mark for earthing (grounding)

U
With guard wires
T

Section BB

For motor (U, V, W) Make sure to earth (ground) the earth (ground) terminal of the flange
section as well as the earth (ground) terminal in the terminal box.

Earthing (grounding)
terminal (M8)

For cooling fan (A, B, C) For thermal protector (G1, G2)

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

Motor Shaft end Terminal screw size
SF- Frame
Flange No. Mass (kg) A, B,
V5RUF[]K No. D IE KB KD KL LA LB LC LE LG LL LN LZ LR Q QK S T U W U, V, W G1, G2
(C)
11 FF300 160M 110 318 207 318 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 625 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
15 FF300 160L 125 318 207 362 56 330 300 250j6 350 5 20 669 4 18.5 110 110 90 42k6 8 5 12 M8 M4 M4
18 FF350 180M 160 363 230 378.5 56 352 350 300j6 400 5 20 690 4 18.5 110 110 90 48k6 9 5.5 14 M8 M4 M4

NOTE
• The motor with a frame number 180 cannot be installed on the ceiling (with the shaft facing up). For use with the shaft facing
down, the protection rating of the cooling fan is IP20.
• Leave an enough clearance between the fan suction port and wall to ensure adequate cooling. Check that a fan blows air from
the opposite load side to the load side.
• The 400 V class motor has "H" in its model name.

158 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
 Dedicated PM motor (MM-GKR) outline dimension drawings
MM-GKR13 1
□43 60.7 25 □40
5 2.5
φ4.5 installation hole × 4 45°
21.5 Use a hex socket bolt.

φ30h7

37.1
3

φ8h6
Power supply
connector
9.9
13.9 6.4
19.2
27.5
Power supply connector pin-outs
39.8
4
1 Non-load side
2
1234

7°

3
4 Power supply connector
19.2 9.9
5
MM-GKR23, 43
L
7 3
30

26 φ5.8 installation hole × 4 45°

□60
6
Use a hex socket bolt.

7
φ50h7
φ14h6

47.1

Power supply
connector
9.5
8
13.9 5.9
19.2
27.8
KL
Power supply connector pin-outs

9
1
2 Non-load side
1234

3
7°

Power supply connector

19.2 9.5

10
MM-GKR73
□80
95 40 φ6.6 installation hole × 4
8 3 45°
36 Use a hex socket bolt.
φ70h7
φ19h6

57.1

Power supply connector 9.5

19.2 14 12
69.6 27.8
Power supply connector pin-outs
1
2 Non-load side
7°
1234

3
4
Power supply connector
19.2 9.5

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

MM-GKR[] L KL
23 59.6 36.4
43 81.3 58.1

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
159
 Power supply connector pin-out
Pin number Signal name
1 (PE)
2 U
3 V
4 W

NOTE
• Unless otherwise specified, use general dimensional tolerances.
• Use a friction coupling for connection with a load.
• The servo motor with oil seal (MM-GKR_J) has outline dimensions different from those of the standard motor. For details,
contact your sales representative.

 Customized shaft end specifications

D-cut shaft...0.1kW

２５
２１．５

２０．５
１

φ８ｈ６

(Unit: mm)

Key shaft (with key)…0.2kW, 0.4kW, 0.75kW

Ｒ
Ｑ

ＱＫ ＱＬ
Ｕ
Ａ
Ｗ

φＳ

Ａ Ｔ Ｙ

Section A-A

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

MM-GKR[]K T S R Q W QK QL U Y
23, 43 5 14h6 30 26 5 20 3 3 M4 screw, depth: 15
73 6 19h6 40 36 6 25 5 3.5 M5 screw, depth: 20

NOTE
• Not applicable for high-duty operation. Such an operation may result in a fracture of the shaft due to rattling of the key.
• Double round end key

160 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
 Dedicated PM motor (MM-GKR) (with electromagnetic brake) outline
dimension drawings 1
MM-GKR23B
96.4 30 □60

7 3 φ5.8 installation hole × 4

45° 2
26 Use a hex socket bolt.

φ7
0 3

φ50h7
φ14h6
4
47.1

47.1
Power supply
10.8 9.3 9.5
21.6
40.8
19.2
36.4
connector
13.9
27.8
5.9
5
Power supply connector pin-outs Brake connector Non-load side
1
2
1 2 3

3
6
4

4
Power supply
7°

connector
Brake connector pin-outs 19.2 9.5
18.3
13.5°

1
7
1

Brake connector
2
2

MM-GKR43B
□60
118.1
7 3
30
φ5.8 installation hole × 4
45° 8
26 Use a hex socket bolt.

φ7
0 9
φ50h7
φ14h6

10
47.1

47.1

10.8 9.3 9.5 Power supply

19.2 connector 13.9 5.9
21.6
40.8 58.1 27.8
Power supply connector pin-outs Brake connector Non-load side
1
2
1
2 3

3
4

4
7°

Power supply connector

Brake connector pin-outs 19.2 9.5
13.5°

18.3
1
Brake connector
1

2
2

(Unit: mm)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
161
 MM-GKR73B
135.3 40 □80
8 3 φ6.6 installation hole × 4 45°
36 Use a hex socket bolt.

φ9
0

φ70h7
φ19h6

57.1
57

Power supply
5 9.5 connector
10.3 14 12
19.2
20.7 46.1 69.6 27.8
Power supply connector pin-outs Brake connector Non-load side
1
2
1 2 3

3
7°
4

4 7°
Power supply connector
9.5
Brake connector pin-outs
18.4 19.2 Brake connector
1
1

2
2

Power supply connector pin-out

Pin number Signal name
1 Earth (ground)
2 U
3 V
4 W

Brake connector pin-outs

Pin number Signal name
1 B1
2 B2

NOTE
• Unless otherwise specified, use general dimensional tolerances.
• Use a friction coupling for connection with a load.
• The MM-GKR[][]B(J) (electromagnetic brake equipped model) has a straight shaft as standard. The models with a key shaft
are also available as dedicated models. For details, contact your sales representative.

162 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
 Dedicated PM motor (MM-GKR) (with reduction gear) outline dimension
drawings 1
For reverse rotation command
Rotation direction
For forward rotation command
L
LG
LR
Q
□LD 2
LK LH 45°

4-φM
3

φLC
φS
φ
LA 4
Power supply
connector
5
KL

Power supply connector pin-outs

1 6
2
1234

7
4

Dimensions table (Unit: mm)

Reduction ratio (actual
MM-GKR[]G0 L LA LC LD S LH LK KL LG Q LR M
reduction ratio) 8
1/5
(42/221)
1/12
112.7 75 60h7 65 16h6 6.5 48.5 91.7 34.5 25 60.5 7
13
(9/104)
1/20
9
(12/247)
1/20
127.7 106.8
(24/713)
1/5
10
(44/217)
1/12
(48/589)
23 126.6 103.4
1/20
100 82h7 90 25h6 11.5 59 37.5 35 73.5
(32/651)
1/30
(24/713)
1/5
9
(15/77)
148.3 125.1
1/12
(9/110)
43
1/20
(9/189)
157.3 71 134.1
1/30
(12/351)
115 95h7 100 32h6 8 39 50 90
1/5
(19/95)
176.8 13.5 151.4
1/12
(40/475)
73
1/20
(14/285)
179.8 140 115h7 120 40h6 12 73 154.4 45 60 106 14
1/30
(25/722)

4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
163
 Power supply connector pin-out
Pin
Signal name
number
1 (PE)
2 U
3 V
4 W

NOTE
• Unless otherwise specified, use general dimensional tolerances.
• Use a friction coupling for connection with a load.
• The MM-GKR[][]G0 (reduction gear equipped model for general industrial machines) has a straight shaft as standard. The
models with a key shaft are also available as dedicated models. For details, contact your sales representative.

 Dedicated PM motor (EM-A) outline dimension drawings

 EM-AMF
5.5kW 7.5kW
397 □176
352 176
318 114
273 114
116.5 194.5 45°
116.5 149.5 45°
20 79
20 79
3
3
75

+0.010
75
φ 35 +0.010

0
0

φ34

φ35
φ34

125
125

257.5
257.5

-0.025
φ114.3 -0.025

0
0

φ114.3
φ2 φ 20
00 0

φ 23
φ23

0
0

4- φ13.5 4- φ13.5

(Unit: mm)

 EM-AMFB
5.5kW 7.5kW
439 □176
484 □176
360 114
405 114
116.5 149.5 45°
116.5 194.5 45°
20 79 20 79
3 3
75 75
φ35 +0.010

φ35 +0.010
φ34

φ34

0
125

125
257.5

257.5
φ114.3 -0.025

φ114.3 -0.025
0

φ20 φ20
0 0
φ23

φ23
0

4- φ13.5 4- φ13.5

(Unit: mm)

164 4. Specifications
4.4 Outline dimension drawings
 CHAPTER 5
CHAPTER 5 Appendix
4

5.1 How to check specification changes.....................................................................................................................166

6

10

165
 5 Appendix

5.1 How to check specification changes

Check the SERIAL number indicated on the inverter rating plate or packaging. For how to read the SERIAL number, refer to
page 14.

5.1.1 Details of specification changes

 Number of connectable units on the CC-Link IE Field Network Basic
Number of connectable units SERIAL
Master: 1
□□ 204 ○○○○○○ or earlier
Slave: up to 16 stations (16 stations × 1 group)
Master: 1
□□ 205 ○○○○○○ or later
Slave: up to 16 stations (16 stations × 4 groups)

 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in May 2020 or later

Item Details
Mitsubishi Electric geared motor GM-[]
Plug-in option FR-A8ND E kit, FR-A8NP E-kit
Stand-alone option Parameter unit (FR-PU07), LCD operation panel (FR-LU08)
Added parameters Pr.1499, P.E107 (Pr.75)
• Setting value "13" added for Pr.52, Pr.54, Pr.158, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, Pr.1027 to
Pr.1034
Changed parameter setting range • Setting values "1800 and 1803" added for Pr.71 and Pr.450 (for 200/400 V class only)
• Setting values "10000 to 10003, and 10014 to 10017" added for Pr.75 (for the safety
communication model only)

166 5. Appendix
5.1 How to check specification changes
 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in August 2020 or
later
1
Item Details

Mitsubishi Electric Vector control

The SF-V5RU 1.5 to 5.5 kW motors can be driven by the FR-E820-0110(2.2K) to 0330(7.5K)
inverters.
2
dedicated motor (SF-V5RU (1500 r/min
The SF-V5RUH 1.5 to 5.5 kW motors can be driven by the FR-E840-0060(2.2K) to 0170(7.5K)
series))
inverters.
Mitsubishi Electric high-performance
energy-saving motor with encoder
SF-PR-SC 3
Mitsubishi Electric inverter-driven geared
GM-DZ, GM-DP
motor for encoder feedback control
Plug-in option FR-A8AP E kit 4
Access to the parameters, monitor data, and terminals is available.
Inverter Configuration Object (64h)
EtherNet/IP communication specifications • Inverter Parameters (12288 to 16383)
• Monitor Data (16384 to 20479)
• Inverter Control Parameters (20480 to 24575)
5
Access to the parameters, monitor data, and terminals is available.
• Inverter Parameters (12288 to 16383)
PROFINET communication specifications
• Monitor Data (16384 to 20479)
• Inverter Control Parameters (20480 to 24575)
6
Pr.284, Pr.359, Pr.367, Pr.368, Pr.369, Pr.376, Pr.422, Pr.552, Pr.600 to Pr.604, Pr.607,
Added parameters Pr.608, Pr.690, Pr.692 to Pr.696, Pr.802, Pr.823, Pr.828, Pr.833, Pr.840 to Pr.848, Pr.854,
Pr.873, Pr.877 to Pr.881, P.A107 (Pr.285)
• Setting value "8888" added for Pr.11
7
• Setting values "19 and 35" added for Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, and Pr.1027 to Pr.1034
• Setting values "30 and 33" added for Pr.71 and Pr.450

Changed parameter setting range

•
•
Setting values "13, 23, 42, 43, and 74" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189
Setting values "30 to 33, and 130 to 133" added for Pr.190 to Pr.196
8
• Setting values "30 to 33" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322
• Setting values "0 to 2, and 9" added for Pr.800
• Setting value "2" added for Pr.850
• Setting value "6" added for Pr.858 9
• Signal loss detection (E.ECT)
Added faults
• Brake sequence fault (E.MB1 to E.MB3)

10

5. Appendix
5.1 How to check specification changes
167
  Functions available for the inverters manufactured in January 2021 or
later
Item Details Related manuals
Position control (Vector control) is supported for induction motors.
• Pr.420, Pr.421, Pr.423, Pr.425 to Pr.427, Pr.430, Pr.446, Pr.464 to Pr.478, Pr.510,
Pr.511, Pr.538, Pr.698, Pr.1222, Pr.1223, Pr.1225 to Pr.1227, Pr.1229 to Pr.1231,
Pr.1233 to Pr.1235, Pr.1237 to Pr.1239, Pr.1241 to Pr.1243, Pr.1245 to Pr.1247,
Pr.1249, Pr.1282, Pr.1283, Pr.1285, Pr.1286, Pr.1289, Pr.1290, Pr.1292 to Pr.1297
Position control is available.
• Setting values "3 to 5" added for Pr.800
Signals for position control can be assigned to I/O terminals.
• Setting values "76, and 87 to 89" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189 Connection/
• Setting values "24, 36, 38, 56, 60 to 63, 84, 124, 136, 138, 156, 160 to 163, and 184" Function/
Position control (Vector control)
added for Pr.190 to Pr.196 and Pr.313 to Pr.319 Communication/
• Setting values "24, 36, 38, 56, 60 to 63, and 84" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322 Maintenance
Monitoring during position control is available (multifunction monitor).
• Setting values "26 to 31, and 65" added for Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.992
• Setting value "65" added for Pr.54 and Pr.158
• Setting values "65, 222 to 227, and 229" added for Pr.1027 to Pr.1034
The following warnings are added: LP (Stroke limit warning), HP1 (Home position
return setting error), and HP2 (Home position return uncompleted)
The following faults are added: E.OD (Excessive position fault) and E.OA (acceleration
error).
CC-Link IE TSN communication User defined cyclic communication is supported. Function/
specifications • Setting values "38 and 138" of Pr.544 are available for remote registers. Communication
User defined cyclic communication is supported.
EtherNet/IP communication
• "Configurable" is added for the connections of Class 1 communication (I/O Message Communication
specifications
communication) (Instances 100 and 150).
PROFINET communication User defined cyclic communication is supported.
Communication
specifications • Telegram 102 is added for Process Data (Cyclic Data Exchange).
MODBUS/TCP communication CiA402 drive profile (24642 to 24644, 24646, 24648, 24649, and 26623) is added for
Communication
specifications MODBUS registers.
Motor overheat protection by the motor's built-in PTC thermistor is supported.
• Pr.561 and Pr.1016 are added. Connection/
PTC thermistor • Setting value "64" of Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, Pr.1027 to Pr.1034 is available Function/
(multifunction monitor). Maintenance
• E.PTC (PTC thermistor operation) is added.
Inverter parameters and the data used in the PLC function of inverter can be backed
Communication/
Backup/restore function up and restored.
Maintenance
• RD (Backup in progress) and WR (Restoration in progress) indications are added.
Increased magnetic excitation Added functions
Function
deceleration • Pr.660 and Pr.662 are added.
Optimum excitation control The control can be enabled under Advanced magnetic flux vector control. Function
PLC Function
PLC function The structured text (ST) language is supported, and jump commands are supported. Programming
Manual
Connection/
200 V class: 11K to 22K are added. Function/
Capacity
400 V class: 11K to 22K are added. Communication/
Maintenance
Pr.375 added
Function/
Parameters User Defined Cyclic Communication Input/Output Mapping parameters (Pr.1318 to
Communication
Pr.1343) added

168 5. Appendix
5.1 How to check specification changes
 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in May 2021 or later
Item Details Related manuals 1
Applied motor setting
• Setting values "540 and 1140" (200 V class) added for Pr.71 and Pr.450
Connection/
PM motor (MM-GKR 0.4kW and Parameter initial setting
0.75kW, and EM-A 5.5kW and • Setting values "3024, 3044, 3124, and 3144" (200 V class) added for Pr.998
Function/ 2
Communication/
7.5kW) Position control (Vector control) is supported for PM motors (MM-GKR and EM-A). Maintenance
Control mode setting
• Setting values "13 and 14" added for Pr.451 and Pr.800
Added parameters
3
• Pr.350 to Pr.358, Pr.361 to Pr.366, Pr.393, Pr.396 to Pr.399
Setting values
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.52
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189 Function/ 4
Orientation control • Setting values "27, 28, 127, and 128" added for Pr.190 to Pr.196 Communication/
• Setting values "27, 28, 127, and 128" added for Pr.313 to Pr.319 Maintenance
• Setting values "27 and 28" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.774 to Pr.776 5
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.992
• Setting value "22" added for Pr.1027 to Pr.1034
The E800-EPC models are added. Connection/
EtherCAT communication
Added parameters
Function/ 6
specifications Communication/
• Pr.1305
Maintenance
Added parameters
• Pr.136, Pr.139, Pr.514, Pr.515, Pr.523, Pr.524, and Pr.1013 7
Setting values
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.52
• Setting value "84" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189
Emergency drive (except for the • Setting values "18, 19, 65, 66, 165, and 166" added for Pr.190 to Pr.196
Connection/
Function/
8
E800-SCE inverters) • Setting values "18, 19, 65, 66, 165, and 166" added for Pr.313 to Pr.319
Maintenance
• Setting values "18, 19, 65, and 66" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.774 to Pr.776
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.992 9
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.1027 to Pr.1034
ED (Emergency drive) warning added
Simple positioning using CiA402 drive profile
Added parameters 10
• Pr.1220 added
Setting values
• Setting values added for Pr.1320 to Pr.1329
[E800-(SC)EPA][E800-(SC)EPB] "24672, 24689, 24698, 24703, 24705, 24707,
24708, 24719, 24721, and 24728 to 24730"
[E800-EPC] "12288 to 13787, 20488, 20489, 24642, 24646, 24648 to 24650, 24672,
24677 to 24680, 24689, 24698, 24702, 24703, 24705, 24707 to 24709, 24719,
24721, 24728 to 24730, 24831, and 9999"
Ethernet communication • Setting values added for Pr.1330 to Pr.1343
[E800-(SC)EPA][E800-(SC)EPB] "20992, 24639, 24643, 24644, 24673 to 24676, Communication
specifications
24692, 24695, 24820, 24826, 24828, and 25858"
[E800-EPC] "12288 to 13787, 16384 to 16483, 20488, 20489, 20981 to 20990,
20992, 24639, 24643, 24644, 24673 to 24676, 24692, 24695, 24820, 24826, 24828,
25858, and 9999"
User defined cyclic communication specifications
Added parameters
• Pr.1389 to Pr.1398
Ethernet relay operation at reset selection
Added parameter
• Pr.1386
Parameters added for the second functions
Parameters Function
• Pr.1298 and Pr.1299

5. Appendix
5.1 How to check specification changes
169
  Functions available for the inverters manufactured in September 2021 or
later
Item Details Related manuals
Added parameters
• Pr.726 and Pr.727
Setting values
• Setting values "81, 82, and 84 to 86" added for Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, and Pr.1027
BACnet MS/TP communication to Pr.1034 Function/
specifications • Setting values "81 to 86" added for Pr.992 Communication
• Setting value "85" added for Pr.54
• Setting value "86" added for Pr.158
• Setting values "82 and 182" added for Pr.190 and Pr.191
• Setting value "2" added for Pr.549

 Functions available for the inverters manufactured in December 2021 or

later
Item Details Related manuals
Added parameters
• Pr.635, Pr.636, and Pr.638
Setting values
Cumulative pulse monitoring Function
• Setting values "71 and 72" added for Pr.52, Pr.774 to Pr.776, Pr.992, and Pr.1027
to Pr.1034
• Setting value "52" added for Pr.178 to Pr.189
Plug-in option FR-E8DS E kit is available.
Function/
Setting values
24 V external power supply Maintenance/
• Setting values "68 and 168" added for Pr.190 to Pr.196, and Pr.313 to Pr.319
operation FR-E8DS E Kit
• Setting value "68" added for Pr.320 to Pr.322
Instruction Manual
Operation panel indication "EV" (24 V external power supply operation) is added.
Added parameters
Internal storage device status Function/
• Pr.890
indication Maintenance
E.PE6 (Internal storage device fault) fault added
Function/
MM-GKR motor capacity 0.1 kW and 0.2 kW are added.
Connection
Environmental impact diagnosis Cor (Corrosion warning) warning added Maintenance
function

170 5. Appendix
5.1 How to check specification changes
Warranty
When using this product, make sure to understand the warranty described below.

1. Warranty period and coverage

We will repair any failure or defect (hereinafter referred to as "failure") in our FA equipment (hereinafter referred to as the "Product")
arisen during warranty period at no charge due to causes for which we are responsible through the distributor from which you
purchased the Product or our service provider. However, we will charge the actual cost of dispatching our engineer for an on-site repair
work on request by customer in Japan or overseas countries. We are not responsible for any on-site readjustment and/or trial run that
may be required after a defective unit are repaired or replaced.
[Term]
The term of warranty for Product is twelve months after your purchase or delivery of the Product to a place designated by you or
eighteen months from the date of manufacture whichever comes first ("Warranty Period"). Warranty period for repaired Product cannot
exceed beyond the original warranty period before any repair work.
[Limitations]
(1) You are requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by yourself, as a general rule. It can also be carried out by us or our
service company upon your request and the actual cost will be charged.
However, it will not be charged if we are responsible for the cause of the failure.
(2) This limited warranty applies only when the condition, method, environment, etc. of use are in compliance with the terms and
conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual and user manual for the Product and the caution label affixed
to the Product.
(3) Even during the term of warranty, the repair cost will be charged on you in the following cases;
• a failure caused by your improper storing or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., and a failure caused by your hardware or
software problem
• a failure caused by any alteration, etc. to the Product made on your side without our approval
• a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if your equipment in which the Product is incorporated is equipped with a safety
device required by applicable laws and has any function or structure considered to be indispensable according to a common
sense in the industry
• a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly maintained
and replaced
• any replacement of consumable parts (condenser, cooling fan, etc.)
• a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal fluctuation of
voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning and natural disasters
• a failure caused by using the emergency drive function
• a failure generated by an unforeseeable cause with a scientific technology that was not available at the time of the shipment of
the Product from our company
• any other failures which we are not responsible for or which you acknowledge we are not responsible for
2. Term of warranty after the stop of production
(1) We may accept the repair at charge for another seven (7) years after the production of the product is discontinued. The
announcement of the stop of production for each model can be seen in our Sales and Service, etc.
(2) Please note that the Product (including its spare parts) cannot be ordered after its stop of production.
3. Service in overseas
Our regional FA Center in overseas countries will accept the repair work of the Product; however, the terms and conditions of the
repair work may differ depending on each FA Center. Please ask your local FA center for details.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi Electric shall not be liable for compensation to:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi Electric.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi Electric products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for
damages to products other than Mitsubishi Electric products.
(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Change of Product specifications
Specifications listed in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents may be changed without notice.
6. Application and use of the Product
(1) For the use of our product, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or
malfunction occurs in product, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to product when any failure
or malfunction occurs.
(2) Our product is designed and manufactured as a general purpose product for use at general industries.
Therefore, applications substantially influential on the public interest for such as atomic power plants and other power plants of
electric power companies, and also which require a special quality assurance system, including applications for railway companies
and government or public offices are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these
applications when used.
In addition, applications which may be substantially influential to human lives or properties for such as airlines, medical treatments,
railway service, incineration and fuel systems, man-operated material handling equipment, entertainment machines, safety
machines, etc. are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used.
We will review the acceptability of the abovementioned applications, if you agree not to require a specific quality for a specific
application. Please contact us for consultation.

171
 Revisions
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
*
Revision date Manual number Revision
Dec. 2019 IB(NA)-0600865ENG-A First edition
Apr. 2020 IB(NA)-0600865ENG-B Added
• FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to 0110(2.2K)(E)(SCE)
• FR-E800-SCE (safety communication model)
Jun. 2020 IB(NA)-0600865ENG-C Added
• Vector control
Nov. 2020 IB(NA)-0600865ENG-D Added
• FR-E820-0470(11K) to 0900(22K)(E)(SCE), FR-E840-0230(11K) to 0440(22K)(E)(SCE)
• Position control (Vector control)
Jan. 2021 IB(NA)-0600865ENG-E Edited
• Models listed on the front cover
Apr. 2021 IB(NA)-0600865ENG-F Added
• MM-GKR and EM-A motors
• Orientation control and emergency drive
• EtherCAT (FR-E800-EPC)
Oct. 2021 IB(NA)-0600865ENG-G Added
• MM-GKR13 and MM-GKR23

172 IB-0600865ENG-G
 INVERTER
INVERTER
FR-E800
Instruction Manual (Connection)

FR-E800
(200V / 400V CLASS)
Compact, high functionality inverters
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0900(22K)
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0440(22K)
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to 0110(2.2K)
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0900(22K)E
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0440(22K)E
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to 0110(2.2K)E
FR-E820-0008(0.1K) to 0900(22K)SCE
FR-E840-0016(0.4K) to 0440(22K)SCE
FR-E820S-0008(0.1K) to 0110(2.2K)SCE

Instruction Manual (Connection) (200V / 400V CLASS)

FR-E800 Instruction
Model
Manual (Connection)

Model code 1A2-P89

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BUILDING 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

IB(NA)-0600865ENG-G(2110)MEE Printed in Japan Specifications subject to change without notice.

G